I ■iii"i iij 'iirpii
ANCIENT PERSIAN
LEXICON AND TEXTS
TOLMAN
7^
BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME
PROM THE
SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND
THE GIFT OF
Henrg 10. Sage
1S91
H.u^^.^.fe.H..3 ^.t..Jl>L....l./
1357
Date
Due
nmi-
I. IP"-!
1.4ii3U,
Ls^^^r
[
»>*^
^"'iiHlll'llMliiiifiiiiiimiliSiS" ^""^ "le texts of
3 1924 026 893 150
Cornell University
Library
The original of tiiis book is in
the Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/cletails/cu31924026893150
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
AND TEXTS
VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY STUDIES
POONDED BY
AUGUSTUS H. ROBINSON
American Agent Lemckb and Buechner, New York City
Foreign Agent Otto Hakbassowitz, Qdebstrasse, 14. Leipzig
A copy, in paper binding, of this number of the series ■will be for-
warded on receipt of a Postal Order for the price (one dollar) anywhere
within the limits of the Universal Postal Union upon application to the
agents or to Vanderbilt University.
NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE
PUBLISHED By VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY
1908
THE VANDERBILT ORIENTAL SERIES
EDITED BY
Herbert Gushing Tolman and Jambs Henry Stevenson
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
AND THE TEXTS OF THE ACHAEMENIDAN
INSCRIPTIONS TRANSLITERATED AND
TRANSLATED WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE
TO THEIR RECENT RE -EXAMINATION
BY
HEKBEET CUSHIl^G TOLMAK
PROFESSOR OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
\
NEW YORK : CIITCINNATI : CHICAaO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
COPYKIGHT, 1908
BT
H. C. TOLMAN
TO
MY FORMER PUPILS
IN SANSKRIT AND AVESTAN
YALE AND VANDEEBILT
1890-1908
THE MDERBILT ORIENTAL SERIES
EDITED BY PROFESSORS
IIekbert Gushing Tolman, Ph.D., D.D.,
AND
James Heistry Stevensox, Ph.D.
"The Vanderbilt Oriental Series deserves a word of wejcome as an A-tnerican
■undertaking," — The NatUnt.
Vol. I. Herodotus and the Empires of the East. Based
on Nikel's Herodot und die Keilschriftforschung. By the
editors. Price, $1.
"A careful assembling of the valuable references in Herodotus, and a
comparison of the native sources." — Prof. Rogers, in History of Babylonia
and Assyria, Vol. I., p. ^64.
Vol. n. Index to the Chandogta Upanishad. By Charles
Edgar Little, Ph.D. Price, |1.
"The plan as conceived is well executed." — The Nation.
Vol. III. Assyrian and Babylonian Contracts (with Ara-
maic Reference Notes) Transcribed from the Originals in the
British Museum, with Transliteration and Translation, by J.
H. Stevenson. Price, $2.50.
" Your professional colleagues ought to be very pleased with the whole
book." — E. A. Wallis Budge, British Museum.
" Dr. Stevenson's book forms a most useful contribution to the study of
Semitic epigraphy." — Luzac's Oriental List.
Vol. IV. Homeric Life. By Prof. Edmund Weissenborn.
Translated by Gilbert Campbell Scoggin, Ph.D., and Charles
Gray Burkitt, M.A. Price, $1.
"The American edition is especially valuable and will prove
a valuable help to every student of Homer." — The Outlook.
Vol. V. Mycenaean Troy. Based on Dorpf eld's Excavations
in the Sixth of the Nine Buried Cities at Hissarlik. By H.
C. Tolman and G. C. Scoggin. Price, $1.
"Laymen and even scholars will be thankful for this concise presenta-
tion. The task has been fairly and sucoesafulljf performed." — Prof. Ru-
fus B. Richardson, in the Independent.
"A satisfactory description of the results of Drs. Sohliemann and Dorp-
feld's excavations." — Classical Review, Eiiglaiul.
Vol. VI. Ancient Persian Lexicon. 'NA'ith texts of the
Achaemenidan Inscriptions Transliterated and Translated.
By H. C. Tolman. Price, %1.2b.
Other iwhiines in the ,^erLv iire in prci>aratlon.
NEW YORK : CINCINNATI : CHICAGO
AMEEICAi^ BOOK COMPANY.
PREFACE
]\Ierivale describes the Man amentum Ancyranum as "a truly
imperial work and probably unique in its kind," but the
record of the Great Darius on the Behistan Rock is just as
"unique." The text of this inscription has been made more
certain by the partial reexamination of Jackson (JAOS, 24 and
27 = Persia Past and Present) and the new collation of King
and Thompson (British Museum, 1907; discussed at date of
present writing by Weissbach, ZDMG, 61; Hoffmann-Kutschke,
Phil. Nov. Ill; Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1; Bartholomae, WZKM, 22).
Their work has solved many old problems and at the same
time presents new ones. I confess that I am not in sympathy
with those who are bold enough to style the KT readings Fehler,
wherever they conflict with previous emendations which were
attractive and ingenious. The two English scholars have had
years of experience in copying cuneiform tablets and in their
long task were doubtless able to catch the most favorable efi'ects
of light and shadow upon the stone. In fact it is doubtful if
another examination of the rock would now add very materially
to our accurate knowledge of the text. Our chief help in the
future may come from the discovery of some of the duplicate
copies, written on bricks {i halat) and leather (? SU, Jensen),
which Darius declares he sent into all lands, mene (det) tuppi-me
+ + + + tinai (m) taiyaus marrita atima (m) u muggiya (m) tassu-
tum-pe sapis (Elam. Bh. 1. = Pers. Bh. iv, 11. 88-92), a fragment
of vhich (BE, 3627 = Bh. 11. 55-58; 69-72) has already been
found by Koldewey. Again in the Persepolitan Inscriptions we
now have Stolze's photographs supplemented by Jackson's ex-
amination of the original (JAOS, 27). For Xerx. Van cf . Leh-
mann, SBAW, 1900, 625; for Dar. Suez cf. Daressy, BeriHiinh
des Textes de la Stele de Ohalouf {Recueil de Travaux, Maspero,
11, 160-71); for Elvend Inscriptions cf. de Morgan, Minsion
scientifiqui' en Perse^ 2, 137; for Art. Hamadan cf. Tolman, Re-
examiiiatioit of Molding ■>< of Columns from Ecbatana, PAPA, 36,
32; for Kernian Inscr. cf. Jackson, JAOS, 27, 190. How accu-
rately and painstakingly Rawlinson accomplished his great task
at Behistan is newly attested by the recent reexaminations.
Jackson has noted that this patient workman inscribed his own
name below the inscription he had copied, and certainly if any
(vii)
phrase deserves imperishable record on the Great Kock it is that
of "H. C'. Rawlinson, 1844." It is quite remarkable also what
a number of conjectures made many years ago by Oppert is
now confirmed.
My frequent references to works cited will show my obliga-
tion to modern scholars. Bartholomae's Altiranisches Worter-
Imch (with his Ziom Altiran. Wb. in IF, Beiheft zum XIX.
Sand) has been my constant vade-mecum, as it is of all Avestan
scholars. It is hardly necessary to speak of the light thrown
on the ancient language through the investigations in Middle
Persian, New Persian, and the other modern dialects by Sale-
mann (Mittelpersisch; Gnmdr. d. iran. Philol.), Htibschmann
{Persische Studlen and Etyinologie und Lautlehre der ossetlschen
Sprache), Horn ( Gr'undriss der neuperaischen Etyrnologie), Justi
{Kurdlsche Grammatil), Socin {Kurdiich; Grundr. d. iran.
Philol.), Geiger (Afyajiisch, Baluci; op. clt.), Gv&j {Indo- Iranian
Phonology) and others. The importance of the Turfan MSS.
material (F. W. K. Mtiller; Ilandschriftenreste — aus Turfan)
was not overestimated at the time of its discovery, and its bear-
ing on the older languages is being constantly brought into
greater prominence. I have used the transliteration of the
Estrangelo script, which is of course hardly adapted to the
character of the 'language, e. g. 'ud for ud < uta; murdftn for
murdan, cf . New Pers. murda; gQkhan (Earth olomae), not gSkhun
(Mtiller); 'ulftn (Bartholomae), not '6san (Mtiller).
The results of their Elamite studies put forth with such assur-
ance by Htising, Jensen, Bork, and others, I have used perhaps
with too great caution. We are forced to admit that our knowl-
edge of this language, notwithstanding our richly increased ma-
terial (Scheil, Textes elamites-semitiques, Textes elainites-anzan-
Ites; Deleg. en Perse, 1900-1907), is still very inadequate, and
I feel it is hazardous to base our interpretation of the Persian
on a corresponding Elamite expression which is not absolutely
certain.
Professor Weissbach wrote me a few months ago that the
second Lieferung of his Pie altpersischen Keilinsclxriften would
soon be ready, and I regret that I have been unable to avail
myself of it during the preparation of my manuscript. I have,
however, held back the sheets that I might consult it before
the volume went to press.
Herbert Gushing Tolman.
June 1, 1908.
(viii)
ABBEEYIATIONS
AF = Arische Forschungen
Afy. = Afyan
AJP = American Journal of Philology
APAW = Abhandlungen der koniglich-Preussischen Akademie
der Wisseoschaften (1904, Plandscliriftenreste in Es-
trangelo-Schrift aus Turfan, F. W. K. Mliller)
Ai. Gram. = Altindische Grammatik (Wackernagel)
Altiran. Wb. = Altiranisches Worterbuch (Bartholomae, 1904)
Art. = Artaxerxes
Assyriol. Bibl. = Assyiiologische Bibliothek
Av. = Avesta or Avestan
Av. Gram. = Avesta Grammar (Jackson)
Bab. = Babylonian
BB = Beitrage zur Kunde der indogermanischen Sprachen
Bal. = BalucI
Benfey = Die persischen Keilinschriften (1847, Benfey)
Bh. = Behistan
Dar. = Darius
de Morgan = Mission scientifique en Perse
ed. = recent edition or editions
Elam. = Elamite
Elv. = Elvend
GAv. = Ga^a Avesta
Gil. = GllakI
Grundr.^ = Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik, Zweite
Bearbeitung (Brugmann)
Grundr. = Grundriss der iranischen Philologie (Awestasprache
und Altpersisch, Vol. I, Bartholomae)
(ix)
Grundr. = Grundriss der neupersischen Etymologie (Horn)
Ham. = Hamadan
Hdt. = Herodotus and Empires of the East (Tolman and Stev-
enson)
I. E. = Indo-European
JF = Indogermanische Forschungen
Ir. En. = Die iranischen Eigennamen in den Acliamenidenin-
schriften (Htising)
Iran. Namenbuch = Iranisches Namenbuch ( Justi)
JAOS = Journal of American Oriental Society
Jn. = Jackson, who made in 1903 a partial reexamination of
the Bh. rock and the inscriptions of Persepolis
(JAOS, 2i and 27 = Persia Past and Present)
JRAS = Journal of Eoyal Asiatic Society
Jud. Pers. = Judaic Persian
Kas = KasanI
Kossowicz = Inscriptiones Palaeo-Persicae (1872, Kossowicz)
Kr. = Kerman
KT = King and Thompson; The Sculptures and Inscription of
Darius the Great on the Rock of Behisttin, British
Museum, 1907. KT have newly copied the Persian,
Elamite, and Babylonian texts
Kurd. = Kurdish
KZ = Zeitschrift fiir vergleichende Sprachforschung
Middle Pers. = Middle Persian
New Pers. = New Persian
NR = Naks-i-Rustam
NS = Neupersische Schriftsprache (Grundr. d. irau. Philol.,
Horn)
OP. Insc. = Old Persian Inscriptions (Tolman)
Or. Litt. Ztg. = Orientalistische Ijitteratur-Zeitung
Oss. = Ossetic
PAPA = Proceedings of American Philological Association
(X)
Pers. = Persepolis
Pers. Stud. = Persisohe Studien (Hiibschmann)
Phil. Nov. = Philologiae Novitates
Ph]. = Pahlavl
PWb. = Sanskrit- Worterbuch (Bohtlingk und Roth)
Rawlinson = The Persian Cuneiform Inscription at Behistun {=
JRAS, Vols. X, xi; 1846, 1849)
SA == Die Sprache der Afghanen (Geiger)
SB = Die Sprache der Baliitschen (Geiger)
SBAW = Sitzungsberichte der koniglich-Preussischen Akade-
mie der Wissenschaften (1904, Handschriftenreste
aus Turfan, F. W. K. Miiller)
SK = Die Sprache der Kurden (Socin)
Skt. Gram. = Sanskrit Grammar (Whitney)
Spiegel = Die altpersischen Keilinschriften. 2. Auflage
(Spiegel)
Stolze = Persepolis (Stolze)
Sus. = Susa
Sz. = Suez.
Turfan MSS., see APAW
Vdt. Stud. = Vanderbilt University Studies. The Behistan
Inscription of King Darius, Translation and Critical
Notes to the Persian Text with special reference to
recent Reexaminations of the Rock, March, 1908
(Tolman)
"VVB = Weissbach und Bang; Die altpersischen Keilinschriften;
WB" = Zweite Lieferung
WZKM = Wiener Zeitschrift fiir die Kunde des Morgenlandes
Xerx. = Xerxes
YAv. = Younger Avesta
ZDMG = Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesell-
schaft
Zum Altiran. Wb. = Zum Altiranischen Worterbuch (= IF,
Beiheft zum xix. Band, Bartholomae)
(xi)
SPECIMEN OF TEXTS, Bh. Col. iv, 14.
PERSIAN.
'^' <r<r m ^TrTfrri- < Trrrr '^TrK^ y^<rr
67. Catiy darayavaus xsaya^iya tuvam [ka] xsayaftya 68. hya
aparam ahy martiya [hya] draujana ahatiy hyava [zujrakara + +
ahat-69. iy avaiy ma dausta + + + a ufrastadiy parsa
ELAMITE.
ylfj -t'- TtrTT- TTT< yj. ^:^rr f^ T< ^tr T mp "tT'.r- rmr<H
82. aiak (m) tari-83. yamaus (m) zunkuk nanri (m) ni [(m)
zunkuk (m) akka messin] nekti (m) ruh(id)-irra titukra hupirri
aini in kannenti aiak aini (m) akka appan- Si. la-ikkimme
huttis
BABYLONIAN.
105. (m) da-ri-ia]-mus [sarru] ki-a-am i-kab-bi man-nu
at-ta sarru sa be-la-a ar-ki-ia amfilu sa u-par-ra-su u am&lu
UD-lS-A-NI 106. lata-
++++++++
BASE OF COLUMN WITH XERXES INSCRIPTION
Found at Susa (trilingual)
J. de Morgan, Delegation en Perse, I, 90.
Xerx. Sus.
Transliteration
l)fetiy xsayarsa xsayaft[ya] vasna au[rama]zdalia 2)ima hadi[s d]ara-
yavaus xsayaftya [ajkunaus hya [mana] pit [a]
Translation
Says Xerxes the king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda this
dwelling Darius the king made who (was) my father.
(1)
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
INSCRIPTIONS OF BEHISTAN (Bh.)
Col. I.
1. l)Adani Diirayavaul xsaya^iya vazarka^ xsaya6i[ya xsaya]-
6iy-2)anam xsaya^iya Parsaiy xaaya^iya dah[yunam] V'st-3)as-
pahya pu^'^a Arsamahya napa IIaxamani5[iya
2. 6]atiy ijDarayavaus x.sfiya^iya mana pita V'staspa V's-
taspa[hya pitja Ars-5)ama Arsamahya pita Ariyaramna'^ Ariya-
ramnahya pit[a CispiS]^ Cisp-6)ais pita Haxamanis
3. fetiy Darayavaus xsaya[6iya ava]hyara-T)diy vayara Hax-
amanisiya fehyamahy haca paruvpyata ajmata* aina-S)hy liaca
paruviyata hya amaxam tauma XHaya[Wya a]ha
4. 6-9)atiy Darayavaus xsilya^iya VIII mana taumay[a tyaijy
[pajruvam 10)x8aya^iya aha° adam navama IX duvitajsarauam^
[vayam] xsaya^i-ll)ya amahy
5. 6atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya va[sna] Auramazd-12)aha adam
xsaya^iya amiy Auramazda xla^''am mana [frjabara
6. 6-13)atiy Darayavaus xslya^iya iiua dahyava tj^a mana
[patjiyaisa'' vasn-14)a Auramazdaha [ajdamsam xsaya^iya aham
Pfirsa Uvaja [BJabirui A-15)6ura Arabaya jMudraya tyaiy dra-
yahya^ Sparda Yaun[a Mada] Armina Kat-16)ipatnka ParSava
Zra"ka' Haraiva Uvarazmiya Baxtris [Sugjuda Ga^dura Sa-17)ka
©atagus IIa[ra]uvatis Maka fraharavam* dahyaA'a XXIII
' vazarka, Noldeke, Foy, Bartholomae. vazraka, ed. See voc.
== ariyarimna, ed. wrongly. See voc.
^o'ispis, see voc.
^idatil, Andreas-Hiising. See voc.
^ duvitaparanam, Tolman, Bartholomae (with different meaning),
duvitaparnam, KT, WB"; also, HuEfmann-Kutsthke, wlio propo.-HS an
etymology contrary to philological laws, duvitataranam, ed. wrongly.
See voc.
"darayahya, ed. KT, wrongly.
'zara"ka, ed.
*fraharavam, Bartholomae. fraharvam, KT, ed. See voc.
(3)
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED
INSCRIPTIONS OF BEHISTAN
High up on the perpendicular face of the great Behi»tan Roch,
66 miles west of JIamadan {Eciatana), vihere are sculptured
King Darius and two attendants; ienectth hinfoot the prostrate
Pseudo-Smerdis, while facing the hing is the standing row of
tlie nine captives; ahuve is the divine synilwl; helow the panel
the four columns of Persiun text {ca. 12ji6 ft.)with col. five to
their right., while to their left are the three columns of Elamite
version; to left of sculpture the Babylonian version on pro-
jecting MocJi.
Col. I.
1. I (am) Darius, the great king, the king of kings, ^ the king
in Persia, the king of countries, the son of Hystaspes, the
grandson of Arsames, the Achaemenide.
2. Says Darius the king: My father (is) Hystaspes; the father
of Hystaspes (is) Arsames; the father of Arsames (is) Ariaram-
nes; the father of Ariaramnes [is Teispes]; the father of Teispes
(is) Achaemenes.
3. Says Darius the king: Therefore^ we are called the Achae-
menides; from long ago we have been of ancient lineage;'* from
long ago our family have been kings.* j
4. Says Darius the king: 8 of my family (there were) who
'Cf. in Phi. the Semitic logogram malkan malki spoken as s.UiJ,n sah,
king of hings, somewhat as we write Deo volente but speak the phrase as
"Providence permitting."
2 avahyaradiy. In the modern Persian dialects the survival of rj,diy is
noteworthy; in New Pers. ra is used in a, general adverbial sense, e. g.
roz-ra, by day, ci-rii, why; cf. Horn, NS, 53, C; in Afy. lara (metathesis
for rala) is an aiHx for dat., e. g. >r.a {mountain) + lara, Geigcr, SA, 17;
in Baluci ra is postposition for dat. and ace, e. g. togara, Geiger, SB, 9;
in Kurd, ra is also alfix for dat., Socin, SK, 158.
^KT plainly record [a^mata. For emendation adata see voc. and cf.
nist banti 'at nl azati, there is neither bond nor free, Neutest. Bruchstiicke
in soghdischer Sprache, Muller, SBAW, 1907. Bab. [m*ir]-banuti (pi), the
same word which is used in the phrase m.ir-baniiti (pi) sa it-ti-su gab-bi=
Persian martiya tyaisaiy frataraa anusiya.
^Or our family have been royal; cf. ;i;s3van6tii Neutest. Bruchstiicke in
soghdischer Sprache.
(3)
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
7. Oatiy Daia-lS)yavaus xsaya^iya ima dahyava tya niana
pati[yaisa°] vasna Au-19)ramazdaha ma[n]a ba°daka aha"ta maiia
bajim abara°ta [tyajsam hacama 20)afehya xsapava raucapativa
ava akunavaya"ta^
8. ^atiy [Dara]yava-21)us xsaya^iya a"tar ima dahyava martiya
hya agar[ta]^ aha avam u-22)bartam abaram hya araika aha
avaiii ufrastam apai-sam vasn[a] Aaramazda-23)ha ima dahyava
ty^n^a mana data^ apariyaya"*' yaftxsam hacama afeh-24)ya
[ajvate akunavaya"ta^
9. ^atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya Auramazda-25)m[aiy] ima^
x5ai9''am frabara Auramazdamaiy upastam abara yata ima xsa6''am
26)ha[ma]dara3rai[y]'' rasna Auramazdaha ima xsa^^'am dara-
yamiy
10. 6a-27)tiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya ima tya mana kartam
pasavaya^a xs-28)aya6iya abavam Ka'^bujiya nama Kuraus pu^''a
amaxam taamay-29)a hauv''m''^ ida xlaya^iya aha avahya
Ka^bujiyahya bra-30)t[a Bardijya nama aha hamata^ hamapita
Ka^bujiyahya pasava Ka°-31)b[u]'iya ajvam Bardiyam avaja"
yaOa Ka"bujiya Bardiyam avaja" karahy-32)[a naiy] azda abava
tya Bardiya avajata^" pasava Ka°bujiya Mudrayam 33)[asiya]va
ya^a Ka"bujiya Mudrayam asiyava pasava kara araika abava
34)[pasavaJ drauga dahyauva vasiy^^ abava uta Parsaiy uta
Madaiy ut-36)[a anjiyauva dahyuluva
11. ^atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya pa-36)[sava] I martiya magus
aha Gaumata nama^^ hauv udapatata haca Paisi-87)[ya]uvadaya
Arakadris nama kaufa haca avadasa Viyaxnahya mah-38)[ya]
XIV raucabis fekata aha" yadiy udapatata hauv karahya ava^a
39)[a]durujiya adam Bardiya amiy hya Kuraus pu^'a Ka'^buji-
^ akunavaya°ta, Bartholomae. akunavyata, ed.
^agarta, Tolman, Bartholomae (with different meaning). agT" + + KT.
The emendation dausta is impossible. See too.
^ tyana mana data, KT. Probably dittography for tya mana data. See
voc. s. v. tya.
••ilpariyaya", Bartholomae. apariyaya", ed. KT. See voc. s, v. hapariya.
^ akunavaya^ta, Bartholomae. akunavyata, ed.
*auramazdrim[aiy] ima, KT.
'ha[ma]darayai[y], KT. See voc.
^hauv^m", KT. Wrongly [pa]ruvam, ed.
8 Or haplography for hamamata, Bartholomae.
'"avajata, KT. avajata, Gray, Bartholomae. See voc.
i^vasiy or vasaiy. Wrongly vasiya, Miiller. See voc.
12 nam", nama". Bartholomae. See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRAXSLATED
were formerly kings; I am the ninth (0); long aforetime^ we were
(lit. are) kings.
5. Says Darius the king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda I am
king; Ahura Mazda gave me the kingdom.
6. Says Darius the king: These are the countries which came
to me; by the grace of Ahura Mazda I became king of them;—
Persia, Susiana, Babylonia, Assyria, Arabia, Egypt, the (lands)
which are on the sea, Sparda, Ionia, [^Media], Armenia, Cappa-
docia, Parthia, Drangiana, Aria, Chorasmia, Baotria, Sogdiana,
Ga(n)dara, Scythia, Sattagydia, Arachosia, the Macae; in all
(there are) 23 countries.
7. Says Darius the king: These (are) the countries which
came to me; by the grace of Ahura JMazda they became subject
to me; they bore tribute to me; Avhat was commanded to them
by me night or day^ this they did.
8. Says Darius the king: Within these countries what man
was watchfuP him well esteemed I esteemed; who was an enemy,
him well punished I punished; by the grace of Ahura Mazda
these countries respected my laws; as it was commanded by me
to them, so they did.
9. Says Darius the king: Ahura Mazda gave me this king-
dom; Ahura Mazda bore me aid until I obtained this kingdom;
by the grace of Ahura Mazda I hold this kingdom.
10. Says Darius the king: This (is) what (was) done by me
after that I became king; Cambyses by name, the son of Cyrus
(was) of our family; he was king here; of this Cambyses there
was a brother Bardiya (i. e. Smerdis) by name possessing a
common mother and the same father with Cambyses; afterwards
Cambyses slew that Bardiya; when Cambyses slew Bardiya, it
was not known* to the people that Bardiya was slain; afterwards
'duvitaparanam. My interpretation (Vdt. Stud. 8) has been accepted
by several critics. Bartholomae, however, writes me that he would con-
nect duvita with Middle Pers. dit, and render the compound orae after an-
other. If this view be correct, I would take the preceding numeral in con-
nection with the word, translating nine in succession we were kings.
^Cf. Turfan MSS., sab 'ud roj, night and day, M. 33.
''agar[tal. My supplement (Vdt. Stud. 9) seems to me quite certain;
cf. Turfan MSS. vigardn^d.
*Cf. Turfan MSS., pat nldfdr saved 'o Galihih 'ut 'azd qarfid '6 Simon
At + + + + ['a]bArig, at sunset (Ba,Ttho\oma,e; evening, Andreas) jro to Gal-
ilee and mahe known to Simon and the others.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
yahya br-40)[a]ta pasava kfira harava hami^'iya abava haca
Ka°bujiya abiy avam 41 ) [ajsiyava uta Parsa iita Mada uta aniya
dahyava xsa^''ara hauv42)agarbayatri Garmapadahya mahya IX
raucabis fekata aha" avafe xsa-43)^''am agarbayata pasava
Ka°bujiya uvamarsiyus amariyata
12. 6atiy ■4-J:)Darayavaus xsaya^iya aita xsa^'am tya Gaumata
hya magus adm-45)a Ka"bujiyam aita xsafi'am haca paruviyata
amaxam taumaya a-46)ha pasava Gaumata hya magus adina
Ka°bujiyam uta Parsam uta 47)AIadam uta aniya dahyava hauv
ayasata^ uvaipaSiyam akuta hau-4.S)v xsaya^iya abava
13. 6atiy Darayavaus x'^fiya^iya naiy aha martiya 49)naiy
Parsa naiy ]\I;lda naiy amaxam taumaya kasciy hya avam Gau-
50)matam tyam magum xSa^'am ditam caxriya karasim haca
darsma"^ a-51)tarsa karam vasiy avajauiya hya paranam Bardi-
yam adana avahyar-52)adiy karam avajaniya matyamam xsnasa-
tiy tya adam naiy Bard-o3)iya amiy hya Kuraus pu6''a kasciy
naiy adarsnaus cisciy festana-54)iy pariy Gaumatam tyam
magum yata adam arasam pasava adam Aura-55)maz[d]iim pati-
yavahyaiy'' Auramazdfimaiy upastam abara Bagayadais 66)mahya
X raucabis ^al5:ata aha" avafe adam hada kamnaibis martiyai-
bi-57)s avam Gaumatam tyam magum avajanam uta tyaisaiy
fratama mar-58)tiya anusiya aha^ta Sika[ya]uvatis nama* dida
Nisaya na-59)ma dahyaus IMfidaiy avadasim avajanam xsa^^'am-
sim adam adinam va-60)sna Auramazdaha adam xIayaSiya
abavam Auramazda xsa^'am mana fr-61)abara
14. 6atiy Dfirayavaus xsaya^iya xsa^'^am tya haca amaxam
ta-62)umaya parfibartam aha ava adam patipadam alvunavam
adamsim gafe-63)va^ avastuyam ya^a parnvamciy avaSa adam
akunavam ayadan-(34)a tya Gaumata hya magus viyaka'' adam
niya^'arayam kurahyfi al)i-65)caris^ gaiftTmca mauiyamca v'S^bH-
s''c''a' tyadis Gaumata h[ya] 66)magus adIna adam karam gafeva
avastayam Parsam[c]a Madam[c]-07) a uta aniya dahyava yafe
paruvamciy ava^a adam tya parriba[rta]-6S)m patiyabaram vasna
layasafa, Bartlioloiu;ie. iiyasta, ed., KT. aj-asla, Kern,
^^darsiiia", Bartliolomae. darSain, ed. darsama, KT, See voc.
° patiyavahyaij', Jn., KT. See voe-.
^namna. namun, Baitholomae. See voc.
'•gaOva, ed.. KT, wrongly. See voc.
''abioarig, KT, Jn. See voc.
'Text as conlirmcd by KT and Jn. vi"l)is, Justi, Tolman. viCabisaca-
cu, Foy. Formerly viftiibis. Gray, Bartholomae. vlflibis, ed. See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED
Cambyses went to Egypt; when Cambyses went to Egypt, after
that the people became hostile; after that there was Deceit to
a great extent in the land, both in Persia and in Media and in
the other provinces.
11. Says Dai-ius the king: Afterwards there was one man, a
Magian, Gaumata by name; he rose up from Paishiyauvadft;
there (is) a mountain Arakadri by name; from there — 14 days
in the month Viyakhna were completing their course when he
rose up; he thus deceived the people; I am Bardiya the son of
Cyrus brother of Cambyses; afterwards all the people became
estranged from Cambyses (and) went over to him, both Persia
and Media and the other provinces; he seized the kingdom; 9
days in the month Garmapada were completing their course —
then he seized the kingdom; afterwards Cambyses died by a
self-imposed death.
12. Says Darius the king: This kingdom which Gaumata the
Magian took from Cambyses, this kingdom from long ago was
(the possession) of our family; afterwards Gaum&ta the Magian
took from Cambyses both Persia and Media and the other prov-
inces; he seized (the power) and made it his own possession; he
became king.
13. Says Darius the king: There was not a man neither a
Persian nor a Median nor any one of our family who could
make Gaumata the Magian deprived of the kingdom; the peo-
ple feared him for his tyranny; (they feared) he would slay the
many who knew Bardiya formerly; for this reason he would
slay the people; "that they may not know me that I am not
Bardiya the son of Cyrus;" any one did not dare to say any-
thing against Gaumata the Magian until I came; afterwards I
asked Ahura Mazda for help; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; 10
clays in the month Bagayftdi were completing their course —
then I with few men slew that Gaumata the Magian and what
foremost men were his allies; there (is) a stronghold Sikayau-
vati by name; there is a province in Media, Nisaya by name;
here I smote him; I took the kingdom from him; by the grace
of Ahura Mazda I became king; Ahura Mazda gave me the
kingdom.
14. Says Darius the king: The kingdom which was taken
away "from our family, this I put in (its) place; I established it
on (its) foundation; as (it was) formerly so I made it; the sane-
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
Auramazdaha ima adam akunavam adam hamatax[saiy] 69)yata
v'fem t)'am amaxam gafeva avastajam ya^a [par]uvam[ci]y
70)ava^a adam hamataxsaiy vaina Auramazdaha ya^a Gaumata
hya magii-71)s v'fem tyam amaxam naiy parabara
15. ^atiy Darayavaus xsaya6-72)iya ima tya adam akunavam
pastTva ya^a xsaya^iya abavam
16. fetiy 73)Darayavaus xsaya^iya ya^a adam Gaumatam
tyam magum avajanam pa-74r)sava I martiya A^'ina nama Upa-
dara'^mahya' pu^ a hauv udapata[ta Uvajai]-75)y karahya ava^a
afeha adam Uvajaiy xsaya^iya amiy pa[sava] Uva-76)jiya ham-
i^'iya abava" abiy avam [AJ^'inam asiyava" hauv x[saya^iyaj
77)abava Uvajaiy uta I martiya Babiruviya Nadi^tabaira nama
Aina[ira]hy-78)a pu^^'a hauv udapatata Babirauv karam ava^a
adurujiya adam Nab-79)uk"dracara amiy hya Nabunaitahya
pu^'a pasava kara hya Babiruviya 80)haruva abiy avam Nadi°-
tabairam asiyava Babirus hami^'iya abava x-81)sa^''am tya Ba-
birauv hauv agarbfiyata
17. ftltiy Darayavaus xsaya-82)6iya pasa^•a adam frtliSayam
Uvajam hauv A^''[i]na basta anayata a[biy m]a-83)m adamlim
avajanam
18. 6atiy DarayavauH xsaya^iya pasava adam Ba-84)birum asi-
yaN'am abiy avam Nadi"tabairam hya Nabuk"dracara aga[ubat]-
a 85)kara hya Nadi"tabairahyri Tigram adaraya a\'ada aistata^ uta
86)abis navi3'a aha pasava adam karam malkauva avakanam an-
iyam usa-87)barim^ akunavam aniyahya asam* franayam^ Aura-
[mazjdamaiy upas[t]am 88)abara vasna Auramazdaha Tigram
viyatarayama^ [a]vada avam karam 89)tyam Nadi"tabairahya
adam ajanam vasiy A0'[i]yadiya[hya] mahya XXVI rau-90)cabis
fekata aha" a[va^]a hamaranam akum[a]
19. 6atiy Darayavaus x-91)saya6iya pasava a[da]m Babii'um
asiyavam a^iy' Babiru[m ya^a naiy up]-l)'2)ayam^ Zazana nama
' upadarmahya, ed. upadara"mahya, Oppert, Hiising. See voc.
^aistata, ed.
^usabarim, Jn., KT. us[tr]abarim, Bartholomae.
■•asam, Jn., KT. Formerly as[pa] ed., Bartholomae. See voc.
^frinayam, KT. [patiyjanayam, ed. wrongly. See voc.
« viyatarayama, KT's ciineitorm text, — ma KT's transliteration, viyata-
rayj,m[a], Foy.
'affiy, KT.
8 [abiy]."\yam, Foy.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED
tuaries which Gaumata the Magian destroyed I restored; for the
people the revenue (?) and the personal property and the estates
and the royal residences^ which Gaumata the Magian took from
them (I restored); I established the state on (its) foundation,
both Persia and Media and the other provinces; as (it was)
formerly, so I brought back what (had been) taken away; by
the grace of Ahura Mazda this I did; I labored that our royal
house I might establish in (its) place; as (it was) formerly, so
(I made it); I labored by the grace of Ahura Mazda that Gau-
mata the Magian might not take away our royal house.
15. Says Darius the king: This (is) what I did, after that I
became kins:.
16. Says Darius the king: When I slew Gaumata the Magian,
afterwards there (was) one man A^'ina by name, the son of
Upadara(n)ma; he rose up in Susiana; thus he said to the people;
I am king in Susiana; afterwards the people of Susiana became
rebellious (and) went over to that A6i'ina; he became king in
Susiana; and there (was) one man a Babylonian Nidintu-Bel by
name, the son of Aniri'; he rose up in Babylon; thus he deceived
the peof)le; I am Nebuchadrezzar the son of Nabu-na id; after-
wards the whole of the Babylonian people went over to that Ni-
dintu-Bel; Babylon became rebellious; the kingdom in Babylon
he seized.
17. Says Darius the king: Afterwards I sent to Susiana; this
A5''ina was led to me bound; I slew him.
18. Says Darius the king: Afterwards I went to Babylon
against that Nidintu-Bel who called himself Nebuchadrezzar;
the army of Nidintu-Bel held the Tigris; there he halted and
thereby was a flotilla; afterwards I placed my army on floats of
skins; one part 1 set on camels, for the other I brought horses;
Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura Mazda we
crossed the Tigris; there the army of Nidintu-Bel I smote
utterly; 26 days in the month A^'iyadiya were in course — then
we engaged in battle.
19. Says Darius the king: Afterwards I went to Babylon;
when I had not reached Babylon — there (is) a town Zazana by
'Of. Turfau MSS., mlnbed visbed zandbad dahibM, lord of the house,
lord of the race, etc. visbed = dei- Herr, das Haupt des Geschlechts (to;fm),
das in einem vTs, Oeschlechtsdorf wohnt. Miiller, KTachtrage, SBAW, 1904,
p. 110.
10 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
vardanam anuv Ufratuva^ avada [hauv Na]di°ta-93)baira hya
Nabuk'^dracara agaubata ais^ hada kara patil [mam hamarana]ni
9J:)cartanaiy pasava haina[rana]m akuma Auramazdamaiy upas-
tam abara [vasna Aura]ma-95)zdaha karam tyam Nadi"tabairahya
adam ajanam vasiy aniya api[y]a [ahyat]a^ a-96)pisim parabara
Anamakahya inahya II raucabis ^akata aha" avuOa, hama[ranam
Col. 2.
1. l)tetiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya [pasajva Nadi^tabaira ha-2)da
kamnaibis asabaribis^ a[mufe^ Babjirum asiya-3)va pasava adami
Babirum asiyavam [vasna Auramazdjaha uta Ba-4:)birum agar-
bayam uta avam Nadi°taba[iram agarbfiyajm pasava ava-5)m
]Sl adi'^tabairam adam Babirauv avaja[naQi
2. 6atiy DJarayavaus x-6)saya6iya yata adam Babirauv iiha[m
ima dahyava] tya hacama ha-7)mi^''iya abava" Parsa Uvaja Mada
A^[ura Mudraya Par]feva IMargus ©a-8)tagus Saka
3. ^atiy Darayavaus x[saya^iya I martijya Martiya na-9)ma
Ci^cixrais pu^'a Kuganaka na[ma vardanam Pfirsaiy] avada
adaraya 10)hauv udapatata Uvajaiy karahya &[vaOii aOaha adam]
Imanis amiy U-ll)vajaiy xsaya^iya
4. fiatiy Darayavau[s xsaya^iya] adakaiy adam asiia-12)iy aham
abiyUvajam pasava haoa[ma atarsa"Uva]jiya avam jMarti-13)yam
agarbaya" hyasam maftsta aha [utasim avjajana"
5. 6atiy D-l'i:)arayavaus xsajra^iya I martiya Fra[vartis nama
Mada] hauv udapatat-15)a Madaiy karahya ava^a a^aha [adam
Xsa^rita am]iy [Jvaxstrah-16)ya taumaya pasava kara Mada hya
[v'^apatiy aha] hacama hami^'iya a-17)bava abiy avam Fravar-
tim asiyava hauv [xafiya^iya] abava Madaiy
6. 18)tetiy Darayavaus xsfiyaSiya kara Parsa u[ta ]\'riada hya
npa mam a-19)ha hauv kamham^ ilha pasava adam karam f raisa-
[yam Vi]darna nama Parsa man-20)a ba"daka avamsam ma^istam
akxmavam ava6as[am a^ajham paraita avam k-21)a.ram tyam Ma-
'ufratauva, ed. See voc.
^aisa, ed. See voc.
'[ahyat]a, Kern. [aharat]u, Oppert, KT. [a]ha»[Jat]ri, WB. See voc.
^akiima, Jn. [ak]uma, KT.
''asbaribis, Bartholomae. See voc.
*a[mufla], ^A^oissbach. ab[iy], KT.
'kamnam, ed. kamnama, Tolman. See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED IL
name along the Euphrates— there this Nidintu-Bel who called
himself Nebuchadrezzar went with his army against me to en-
gage in battle; afterwards we engaged in battle; Ahura Mazda
bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura Mazda the army of Nidintu-
Bel I smote utterly; the enemy wore driven into the water; the
water bore them away; 2 days in the month Anftmaka were in
course — then 'v\-e engag-ed in battle.
Col. 2.
1. Says Darius the king: Afterwards Nidintu-Bel with (his)
few horsemen fled (and) went to Babylon ; afterwards I went to
Babylon; by the grace of Ahura ilazda I both seized Babylon
and seized that Nidintu-Bel; afterwards I slew that Nidintu-Bel
at Babylon.
2. Says Darius the king: While I was in Babylon, these (are)
the provinces which became estranged from me, Persia, Susiana,
Media, Assyi'ia, [Egypt], Parthia, Margiana, Sattagydia, Scythia.
3. Says Darius the king: There (was) one man Martiya by
name, the son of Ci(n)cikhri — there (is) a town in Persia Kuga-
naka by name — here he dwelt; he rose up in Susiana; thus he
said to the people; I am Imanish king in Susiana.
4. Says Darius the king: Then I was on the march to Susiana;
afterwards the Susians [feared] me; they seized that Martiya
who was chief of them and slew him.
5. Says Darius the king: One man Phraortes [by name, a
Mede], he rose up in Media; thus he said to the people; [I am
Khshathrita] of the family of Cyaxares; afterwards the Median
people which [were in the palace] became estranged from me
(and) went over to that Phraortes; he became [king] in Media.
6. Says Darius the king: The Persian and the Median army,
which was by me, it was smaU; afterwards I sent forth an army;
Plydarnes by name, a Persian, my subject, him I made chief of
them; thus I said to them; go, smite that Median army which
does not call itself mine; afterwards this Hydarnes with the
army went away; when he came to Media — there (is) a town
in Media Maru by name — here he engaged in battle with the
Medes; he who was the chief among the Medes did not there
[withstand]; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura
Mazda my army smote that rebellious army utterly; 27 days in
13 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
dam jata hya mana naiy gaubataiy pasava hauv Vidarna ha-22)da
kara asiyava ya^a Madam pararasa M[aru]s nama vardanam Ma-
23)daiy avada hamaranam akuuaus hada Mada[ibi]s hya Madai-
suva 24)ma6ista aha hauv adakaiy naiy [ajvada + ^^ Auramazda-
maiy u-25)pastiim abara vasna Auramazdaha kara [hya ma]na^
avam karam t-26)yam hami^''iyam aja" vasiy Anamakahya ma-
h[y]a XXVII raucabis 0akat-27)a aha'' av^^asam hamaranam
kartam pasava hauv [ka]ra hya mana Ka"pada' n5m-28)a dah-
yaus Madaiy avada mam amaniya* yata adam arasam Mada-29)m
7. ^atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya Dfidarsis nama Arminiya
man-30)a ba"daka avam adam fraisayam Arminam avato[saiy]
afeham paraidiy ka-31)ra hya hami0''iya mana naiy gaubataiy
avam [jadjiy pasava Dadarsi-32)s-asiyavayate Arminam pararasa
pasava [hami5']iya ha^gmata parai-33)ta patis Dadarsim hama-
ranam cartanaiy + _,_ + + y nama avahanam A-3tt)rm'niyaiy°
avada hamaranam akunava" Au[rama]zdamaiy upastam a-35)bara
vasna Auramazdaha kara hya mana ava[m k]aram tyam hami^'-
iyam 36)aja" vasiy ©uravaharahya mah[ya] VipLI raucabijs ^akata^
aha" ava^-37)asam hamaranam kartam
8. 6atiy Da[raya]vau[s xsa]ya[^]iya patiy duv-38)itiyam hami-
^''iya ha"gmata parait[a pajtis [Dada]rsim hamaranam carta-
39)naiy Tigra nama dida Arm'ni[yaiy] avada hamaranam aku-
nava° A-40)uramazdamaiy upastam abara vasna Aura[mazda]ha
kara hya mana a-41)vam karam tyam hamiSiyara aja'' vas[iy
®urava]harahya mahya XVIII 42)raucabis ^akata aha" avafesam
hamaranam ka[rtam]
9. Oatij Daraya-4:3)vaus xsaya^iya patiy ^'^itiyam ha[m]i5''[iya]
ha"gmata paraita pat-44)is Dadarsim hamaranam cartanaiy
U[yam]a^ na[m]a dida Arm'niyaiy a-45)vada hamaranam aku-
nava'' Auramazdamaiy upasta[m] abara vasna Aurama-46)zdaha
kara hya mana avam karam tyam ham[i]5'i[yam] Mja"" vasiy
®aigarca-47)is mahya IX raucabis ^akata aha" ava[^as]am hama-
ranam kartam pasava 48)Dadarsi8 cita mam amanaya Ar[m']ni-
[ya]iy [y]ata adam arasam Ma-49)dam
1 [a]vadii + +, KT. [ajvada [aha], Tolman. See voc,
2 [majna, KT.
^kanpada, ed. kanpanda, Foy.
^amaciya, KT.
^armaciyaij', ed. wrongly. See voc.
* wrongly ia[hy]ama, ed. See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 13
the month Anftmaka were completing their course — then the
battle (was) fought by them; afterwards this army of mine —
there (is) a region Ka(m)pada by name in Media — there awaited
me until I went to Media.
7. Says Darius the king: Dadarshi by name, an Armenian,
my subject, him I sent forth to Armenia; thus I said to him;
go, the rebellious army which does not call itself mine, smite it;
afterwards D&darshi went awaj^; when he came to Armenia,
afterwards the rebels came together (and) went against Dadarshi
to engage in battle; there is a village [Zuzza]^ by name in Ar-
menia — hero they engaged in battle; Ahura Mazda Ijore me aid;
by the grace of Ahura Mazda my army smote that rebellious
army utterly; 8 days^ in the month Thuravahara were complet-
ing their course — then the battle (was) fought by them.
8. Says Darius the king: A second time the rebels came to-
gether (and) went against Dadarshi to engage in battle; there
(is) a stronghold, Tigra by name, in Armenia — here they en-
gaged in battle; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the gi-ace of
Ahura Mazda, my army smote that rebellious army utterly; 18
days in the month Thuravahara were completing their course —
then the battle (was) fought by them.^
9. Says Darius the king: A third time the rebels came to-
gether (and) went against Dadarshi to engage in battle; there
(is) a stronghold, U[yam]£l by name,' in Armenia — here they
engaged in battle; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of
Ahura Mazda my army smote that rebellious army utterly; 9
days in the month Thaigarci were completing their course — then
the battle (was) fought by them; afterwards Dadarshi awaited
me in Armenia until I came to Media.
10. Says Darius the king: Afterwards Vaumisa by name, a
Persian, my subject, himl sent forth to Armenia; thus I said to
him; go, the rebellious army which does not call itself mine,
smite it; afterwards Vaumisa went away; when he came to Ar-
menia, afterwards the rebels came together (and) went against
Vaumisa to engage in battle; there (is) a region I[zar]a by
name, in Assyria — here they engaged in battle; Ahura Mazda
i_^ ^ ^ 4. y, text; Elam. zuzza; Bab. zu-u-zu.
2vi[ii rauoabi]s, text. Elam. version makes supplement certain.
"Bab. version; they slew Jive hundred and forty-six and took Jive hun-
dred and twenty prisoners.
14 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
10. Oatij Darayava\3s xsayaSiya + + + + +Vaumisa nama Parsa
mana ba''-50)daka avam adam fiaisayam Arminam ava^asaiy
a^aham paraidiy kara 51)hya hami^''iya mana naiy gaubataiy
avam jadiy pasava Vaumisa a-52)siyava ya^a Arminam pararasa
pasava hami[^''iy]a ha'^gmata paraita pa-53)tis Vaumisam hama-
ranam cartanaiy I + + + _,. a^ nama dahyaus A^uray-54)a avada
hamaranam akunava"" Auramazda[ma]iy upastam abara vasna
Au-55)ramazdaha kara hya mana avam karam t[yam] hami^''iyam
aja" vasiy 66)Anamakahya mahya XV raucabis fekata aha" ava-
^asarn hamaranam 57) kartam
11. Satiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya patiy duvitiyam ham-58)i5''iya
ha'^gmata paraita patis Vaumisam hamaranam cartanaiy Au-
o9)tiyara niima dahyaus Arminiyaiy avada hamaranam aku-
nava'' 60)Auramazdamaiy upastam abara vasna Auramazdaha
kara hya ma-61)na avam karam tyam hamifl'^iyam aja" vasiy
©uravaharahya mah-62)ya jiyamnam^ patiy ava^asam hama-
ranam kartam pasava Vaumisa 63)cita mam amanaya Armin-
iya[iy] yata adam arasam Madam
12. 64)^atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya pasava adam nijayam haca
65)Babiraus asiyavam Madam ja6n. Madam pararasam Ku^d"^-
rus nama 66)vardanam Madaiy avada hauv Fravartis hya Madaiy
xsaya^iya a-67)gaubata ais^ had[a] kara patis mam hamaranam
cartanaiy pasava hamarana-68)m akuma Auramazdamaiy upas-
tam abara vasna Auramazdaha karam 69)tyam Fravartais adam
ajanam vasiy Aduka[ni]sahya mahya XXV ra-70)ucabis fekata.
aha" ava^a hamaranam akuma
13. ^atiy Darayavaus x-71)saya^iya pasava hauv Fravartis
hada kamnaibis asabaribis amu^a Ra-72)ga nama dahyaus Ma-
diiy avapara^ asiyava pasava adam karam f-73)raisayam nipadiy^
Fravartis agarbl[ta]* anayata abiy mam ada-74)msai[y] uta naham
uta gausa uta h''r''banam^ frtijanam utasa-76)iy [ucasjma^ avajam
duvarayamaiy basta adariy haruvasim k-76)ara avaina pasavasim
^ [iz]i[tus] ed. , wrongly. i[zar]I, Tolman. i[zal]a, Weissbach. See voc
^jiyamiiam, see voc. jiyamanam, KT.
'aisa, eel.
■•avapara., KT.
"nipadiy, KT. tyaipatiy, ed. See voc.
»agarbi[ta], KT. agarbi[ta], Bartholomae.
'harbinam, K'L. See voc. uzbanam, Weissbach.
8 ucasma, Weissbach. [ucsa]m, KT. word-divider +casma, Jn.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 15
bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura ]Mazda my army smote that
rebellious army utterly; 15 days in the month Anamaka were
completing their course— then the battle (was) fought by them.^
11. Says Darius the king: A second time the rebels came to-
gether (and) went against Vaumisa lo engage in battle; there
(is) a region Autiyara by name in Armenia — here they engaged
in battle; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura
^.lazd-a, my army smote that rebellious army utterly; at the end
of the month Thiira\-ahara — then the battle (was) fought by
them;^ afterwards Vaumisa awaited me in Armenia until I came
to Media.
12. Says Darius the king: Afterwards I went from Babylon;
I went away to Media; when I went to Media — there (is) a town
Ka(n)duru by name in Media — here this Phraortes who called
himself king in Media went with (his) army against me to en-
gage in battle; afterwards we engaged in battle; Ahura Mazda
bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura Mazda I smote the army of
Phraortes utterly; 25 days in the month Adnkanisha were com-
pleting their course — then we engaged in battle.
13. Says Darius the king: Afterwards this J'hraortes with a
few horsemen fled; there is a region Eagft by name in Media —
along there he went; afterwards I sent forth my army in pursuit;
Phraortes seized was led to me; I cut off (his) nose and ears
and tongue, and I put out his eyes;' he was held bound^ at
my court; all the people saw him; afterwards I put him on a
cross^ at Ecbatana, and what men were his foremost allies, these
I haled within the fortress at Ecbatana.
' Bab. version; they slew two thousand and twenty-four.
2 Bab version; they slew two thousand and forty-Jive and took one thou-
sand Jive hundred and fifty-eight prisoners.
^Cf. Turfan MSS., h6 casm padist vafen[d], tliey spit upon the sockets
of his eyes.
^Cf. Turfan MSS., bast + + + '6 Hgrodos sdh, {he was led) bound to
Herod, the king.
"The phrase seems to mean crucify rather than impale. Almost its ex-
act equivalent occurs in the Dardbadageftig (Crucifixion), M, 18; Yiso'
sakh6n 'abydd ddred j6 pat Galildh '6 'asmdh vi'afrdst kum 'abisparend
'ut qartod ddrdbadag (Bartholomae; darubadag, Miiller) hridig roj 'aj
mtirddn 'akh^zdn, hold in mind the saying of Jesus how in Oalilee he in-
formed you; they will give me over and put me on the cross, (but) the third
day I will rise from the dead. QarSnd <. kar; d4r6 cf. New Pers. dar,
wood; bad < patiy.
16 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
Hagmatanaiy uzmayapatiy akunavam 77)utri ma[r]tiya tyaisaiy
fratama anusiya aha"ta avaiy Ha-78)gmata[naiy] [a°ta]r didam
friiha^jam
14. Satiy Daraj^avaus xs-79)aya^iya I mar[t]iya Ci6'a°taxma
nama Asagartiya hauvmaiy hamii9''iya 80)abava karahya ava^a
aftiha adam xsaya^iya amiy .Asagarta-81)iy Uvaxstra[hya] tau-
maya pasava adam kiiram Parsam ut-82)a Madam fraisayam
Taxmaspada nama Mada mana ba"daka avam-83)sam ma^istam
akunavam [ajva^iisam afeham pai-aita k-84)aram hami^'"ij'am hya
mana naiy gauljiitaiy aram jata pas-85)ava Taxmaspada hada
kara [a]5iyava hamaranam akunaus had-86)a Ci^'a^taxma Aura-
mazdamaiy upastilm abara vasna Auramaz-87)daha kara hya
mana avam karam tyam hami6''iyam aja" uta C-88)i^'a"taxmam
agarbaya anaya abiy mam pasavasaiy adam uta n-S9)aham uta
gausa frajanam utasaiy [ujcasma^ avajam duvaraya-90)niaiy
basta adariy haruvasim kara a[va]i[na] pasavasim Arbairaya
91)uzmayapati[y] akunavam
15. 6atiy Darayava[u]s xsaya^iya ima tya ma-92)na kartam
Ma[da]iy
16. ^atiy^ Darayavaus x5aya6[i]ya Parfeva uta Var-93)kana
[ham]i[6'']iya [aba]va° [hacajma rravar[tai5 aga]u[ba"]ta V's-
taspa mana pita ha-94)uv [Parfevaiy] aha a[va]m kara avaha[rja^
ham]i^''i[ya] abava pasava V'staspa 95)[aliyava hada kar]a h[ya-
saiy] anusi[ya] aha Vis[pa]uz[a]tis nama varda-96)[nam Parfe-
vaiy] avada hamaranam [a]kunau[s] hada Parfevaibils] A[ura-
mazdjamaiy 97)[upastam abara] vasna [A]urama[zdaha V's]ta-
[spa] avam kara[m tyam ha]m[i]^'iya-98)m [aja'^ ^-asiy VJiyaxna-
hya ni[a]hya [XXII raucabis] fekata aha° ava^asam hamaranam
kartam
Col. 3.
I. l)tetiy Darayavaus xsfiya^iya pasava adam kara-2)m Par-
sam fraisayam abiy V'staspam haca Raga-3.)ya ya^a hauv Iviira
parfirasa abiy V'staspam 4)pasa^■a V'staspa ayasatii* avam
karam asiyava Patigraba-5)na nama vardanam Par^avaiy avada
hamaranam akunaus hada 6)hami6'iyaibis Auramazdamaiy up-
lucasma, Weissbach. [ujcsam, KT. word-divider +casma, Jn.
211. 90-98 suppl., KT.
8avaiia[r+], KT. avahar[ja], Tolman. avahar[ta], Weissbach. See voc.
^ayasata, Bartholomae. uyastj, ed., KT.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 17
14- Says Darius the king: One man, Ci6i'-a(n)takhma byname,
a Sagartian, he became rebellious to me; thus he said to the
people; I am king in Sagartia, of the family of Cyaxares; after-
ware^ I sent forth the Persian and Median army; Takhmaspada
by name, a Mede, my subject, him I made chief of them; thus
I said to them; go, the rebellious army, which does not call itself
mine, smite it; afterwards Takhmaspada went away with the
army (and) engaged in battle with Ci^''a(n)takhma; Ahura
Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura Mazda my army
smote that rebellious army and seized Ci0'a(n)takhma (and)
brought (him) to me; afterwards 1 cut off his nose and ears,
and put out his eyes; he was held bound at my court; all the
people saw him; afterwards I put him on a cross in Arbela.
15. Says Darius the king: This (is) what (was) done by me
in Media.
16. Says Darius the king: Parthia and Hyrcania became re-
bellious to me and declared allegiance to Phraortes; my father
Hystaspes, he was [in Parthia]; the people aljandoned^ him
(and) became rebellious; afterwards Hystaspes [went with his
army] which was loyal; there is a town Vish[pa]uz[a]ti by name
[in Parthia] — here he engaged in battle with the Parthians;
Ahura Mazda [bore] me [aid]; by the grace of Ahura Mazda
Hystaspes smote that rebellious army utterly; [22 days^] in the
month Viyakna were completing their course — then the battle
was fought by them.
Col. 3.
I. Says Darius the king: Afterwards I sent forth the Persian
army to Hystaspes from Raga; when this army came to Hys-
taspes, afterwards Hystaspes took that army (and) went away;
there (is) a town Patigrabana by name in Parthia — here he en-
gaged in battle with the rebels; Ahura ]\Iazda bore me aid; by
the grace of Ahura Mazda Hystaspes smote that rebellious army
'avahar[ia]. My supplement (Vdt. Stud. 33) I regard as quite cer-
tain; cf. h^rz, leave in Turfan MSS. e. g. kados Ytso' mandstdr hgrzd bag
mdrt Mdni mand ravin boz, Holy Jesus, release my sins; God, lord, Mani,
redeem my spirit.
2 So Elam. and Bab. versions.
2
18 PSRSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
astam abara vasDa Auramaz-7)daha V'staspa avam karam tyam
hami6i''iyam aja" vasiy Ga-8)rmapadahya mahya I rauca fekatam^
-aha avatesam hamaranam ka-9)rtam.
2. tetiy Darayavaus xsilyaffiya pasava dahyaus ma-10)na abava
ima tya mana kartam Parfe^'aiy
3. ftltiy DarayaTau-ll)s xsaya^iya Margus nama dahyaus
hauvmaiy hmne''iyii^ abava 12)1 martiya Frada nfima Margava
avam ma^istam akunava"ta pasa-13)va adam fraisayam Dadarais
nama Parsa mana ba"daka Baxtriy-lJ-)a xsa^''apava a])iy avam
ava^asaiy aSaham paraidiy ava-15)m karam jadiy hya mana naiy
gaubataiy pasfiva Dadarsis hada k-16)ara asiyava hamaranam
akunaus hada jMurgavaibis^ Auramazd-17)amaiy upastfim abara
vasna Auramazdaha kara hya mana avam karam 18)tyam hami-
^"■iyam aja" vasiy A^l-'iyadiyahya mahya XXIII raucabi-19)s Osl-
kata aha° avatosam hamaranam kartam
4. 6atij Darayavau-20)s xsaya^iya pasava dahyaus manfi abava
ima tya ma-21)na kartam Baxtriya
5. ^atiy Darayavaus x,silya-22)6iya 1 martiya Vahyazdata na-
ma Tarawa nama vardanam 23)Yautiya nama dahyaus Parsaiy
avada adaraya ha-24:)uv duvitlyama^ udapatata Parsaiy karahya
ava^a 25)afeha adam Bardiya amiy hya KurauS pu^'a pasava
26)kara Pilrsa hya v'^apatiy haca yadaya fratarta-^ ha-37)uv
hacama hami^'iya alja^a abiy avam Vahyazdata-2S)m asiyava.
hauv xsaya^iya abava Parsaiy
6. fti-29)tiy Darayavaus xlaya^iya pasa\'a adam karam Parsa-
30)m uta Madam frfiisayam hya upa mam aha Artavard-31)iya
nama Parsa mana ba°daka avamsam ma^istam aku-32)navam hya
aniya kara Parsa pasa mana asiyava Ma-33)dam pasava Artavar-
diya hada kfira asiya^'a Parsam 34)ya0a Parsam pararasa Eaxa
nama -^-ardanam Parsaiy a-35)vada hauv Vahyazdata hya Bardiya
agaubatii ais* 36)hada kfira patis Artavardiyam hamaranam
cartanaiy pas-37)ava hamaranam akunava" Auramazdamaiy
upastam abara va-3S)sna Auramazdaha kara hya mana avam
karam tyam Vahya-39)zdatahya aja" vasiy ©uravaharahya mahya
XII raucabis feka-40)ta aha" a\'atesam hamaranam kartam
ifekatam, KT. See voc.
2 hamiS'iya, KT. Wrongly hasitiya, ed.
' margavaibis, KT. Wrongly margayaibis, ed.
^duvitiyama, Bartholomae. duvitlyam, ed.
s yadaya fratarta, KT. ya[u]daya fratarta, Foy. See voc.
"aisa, ed.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRASSLATED I9
utterly; 1 day in the month Garmapada was completing its
course— then the battle (was) fought by them.i
2. Says Darius the king: Afterwards it became my province;
this (is) what (was) done by me in Parthia.
3- Says Darius the king: There (is) a region Margiana by
name; it became rebellious to me; one man Frada, a Margian,
him they made chief; afterwards I sent forth Dadarshi by name,
a Persian, my subject, satrap in Bactria against him; thus I said
to him; go, smite that army which does not call itself mine;
a,fterwards Dadarshi with the army ■\\'ent away (and) engaged
in battle with the Margians; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the
grace of Ahura Mazda my army smote that rebellious army ut-
terly; 23 days in the month A^i'iyadiya were completing their
course — then the battle (was) fought by them.^
4. Says Darius the king: Afterwards it became my province;
this (is) what (was) done by me in Bactria.
5. Says Darius the king: One man Vahyazdata by name;
there (is) a town Tftrava by name; there (is) a region Yautiya
by name in Persia — here he dwelt; he was the second to rise
against me in Persia; thus he said to the people; I am Bardiya
the son of Cyrus; afterwards the Persian army which (was) in
the palace cast aside their loyalty; they became estranged from
me (and) went over to that Vahyazdata; he became king in
Persia.
6. Says Darius the king: Afterwards I sent forth the Persian
and the Median army which was by me; Artavardiya by name,
a Persian, my subject, him I made chief of them; the rest of
the Persian army went with me to Media; afterwards Artavar-
diya with the army went to Persia; when he came to Persia —
there (is) a town Kakha by name in Persia — here this Vahyaz-
data who called himself Bardiya went with (his) army against
Artavardiya to engage in battle; afterwards they engaged in
battle; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura Mazda
my army smote that army of Vahyazdata utterly; 12 days in the
iBab. version; he slew six (?) thousand five hundred and seventy and
took four thousand one hundred and ninety-two -prisoners.
2 Bab version; he slew fifty-five thousand (sic!) two hundred and + + three
and took six thousand five hundred and seventy-two -prisoners. The Kolde-
wey fragment reads; six thousand nine hundred and seventy, + + + pris-
oners.
20 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
7. 6a,tiy Darayavaus xsaya^i-4rl)ya pasava hauv Vahyazdata
hada kamnaibis asabaiibis a-42)mufe asiyava Paisiyauvadam
haca avadasa karam ayasa-i3)ta^ hyaparam ais^ patis Artavardi-
yam hamaranam cartaiia-44:)iy Parga^ nama kaufa avada hama-
ranam akunava" Auramazdama-45)iy upastam abara vasna Aura-
mazdaha kara hya mana ava-4r6)m karam tyam Vahyazdatahya
aja° vasiy Garmapadahya mah-47)ya V raucabis ^akata aha^ ava-
^iisam hamaranam kartam uta aya-48)m Vahyazdatam agarba-
ya° uta martiya tyaisaiy fratam-49)a anusiya aha^ta* agarbaya"
8. 6a,tij Darayavaus xs-50)aya6iya pasava adam avam Vah-
yazdatam uta martiya 51)tyaisaiy fratama anusiya aha"ta*
Uvadaicaya nama var-52)danam Parsaiy avadasis uzmayapatiy
akunavam
9. 6a-53)tiy Darayavaus, xsaya^iya ima tya mana kartam
Parsaiy
10. 54)6atiy Darayavaus xsayafiiya hauv Vahyazdata hya Bar-
diya 55)agaubata^ hauv karam fraisaya Harauvatim Vivana
56)nama Parsa mana ba'^daka Harauvatiya xsa^'apava abiy ava-
67)m utasam I martiyam ma^istam akunaus avafesam a-58)feha
paraita Vivanam jata uta avam karam hya Daraya-59)vahaus
xsayaffiyahya gaubataiy pasava hauv kara asiya-60)va tyam Va-
hyazdata fraisaya abiy Vivanam hamaranam cartanaiy K-61)ap-
isakanis nama dida avada hamaranam akunava" Auramazdamai-
62)y upastam abara vasna Auramazdaha kara hya mana avam
karam tya-63)m hami6%am aja" vasiy Anamakahya mahya XIII
raucabis fekata aha" a-64)vatesam hamaranam kartam
11. Oatij Darayavaus xsaya^iya patiy h-65)yaparam hami^'iya
ha^gmata paraita patis Vivanam hamaranam cartana-66)iy GaM-
um(?)ava^ nama dahyaus avada hamaranam akunava" Auramaz-
dama-67)iy upastam abara^ vasna Auramazdaha kara hya mana
avam karam t-6S)yam hami^'^iyara aja" vasiy Viya[x]nahya
mahya VII raucabis fekata 69)aha° avaftTsam hamaranam kartam
12. fetiy Darayavaus xsayaffiya 70)pasava hauv mart [iya] hya
avahya karahya ma6[ista a]ha tyam Va-7l)hyazdata fraisaya abiy
layasata, Bartholomae. ayasta, ed., KT.
^aisa, ed.
^paraga, KT, ed.
^ahaHa, KT as Rawlinson; certainly not a " schreibfehler Kawlinsons. "
"agaurata, text, stone-cutter's blunder.
*ga"dutaTa, KT. ga»dumava, Justi.
'ar»r', text, stone-cutter's blunder for abaia.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 2l
month Thuravahara were completing their course — then the
battle (was) fought by them.
7. Says Darius the king: Afterwards this Vahyazdata with
few horsemen fled (and) went to Paishiyauvftda; from thence he
took an army (and) again went against Artavardiya to engage
in battle; there (is) a mountain Parga by name — here they en-
gaged in battle; Ahura Mazda gave me aid; by the grace of
Ahura Mazda my army smote that army of Vahyazdata utterly;
5 days in the month Garmapada were completing their course —
then the battle (was) fought by them and they seized that Vah-
yazdata and what men were his foremost allies they seized.
8. Says Darius the king: Afterwards — there (is) a town in
Persia Uvadaicaya by name — here, that Vahyazdata and what
men were his foremost allies, them I put on the cross. ^
9. Says Darius the king: This (is) what (was) done by me in
Persia.
10. Says Darius the king: This Vahyazdata, who called him-
self Bardiya, he sent forth an army to Arachosia — there (was)
Vivana by name, a Persian, my subject, satrap in Arachosia —
against him (he sent an army) and one man he made chief of
them; thus he said to them; go, smite Vivana and that army
which calls itself of Darius the king; afterwards this army,
which Vahyazdata sent forth, went against Vivana to engage in
battle; there (is) a stronghold Kapishakani by name — here they
engaged in battle; Ahura Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of
Ahura Mazda my army smote that rebellious army utterly; 13
days in the month Anamaka were completing their course — then
the battle (was) fought by them.
11. Says Darius the king: Again the rebels came together
(and) went against Vivana to engage in battle; there (is) a region
Ga(n)dum( ? )ava by name — here they engaged in battle; Ahura
Mazda bore me aid; by the grace of Ahura Mazda my army
smote that rebellious army utterly; 7 days in the month Vi-
yakhna were completing their course — then the battle (was)
fought by them.
12. Says Darius the king: Afterwards this man, who was
chief of that army which Vahyazdata sent against VivSna, he
fled with a few horsemen (and) went away — there (is) a strong-
hold Arshada by name in Arachosia — he went thereby; after-
wards Vivana with an army went in pursuit of them; here he
seized him and what men were his foremost allies he slew.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
Vivanam hauv am[ufei ha]da kamnaib-72)is asabaribis asiyava
Arsada nama dida [Hajrauvatiya a-73)vapara2 atiyais^ pasava
Vivana hada kara nipadi[y] t[ya]iy* asiya-74)va avadasim agar-
baya u[t]a martiya tyaisaiy fratama anusiya 75)aha°ta avaja"
13. fetiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya pasava dahyaus nia-76)na
abava ima t3^a mana kartam Harauvatiya
14. fetiy DarayavsLus xsa-77)yaeiya yata adam Parsai[y] u[t]a
Madaiy aham patiy duvitlyam 78)Babiruviya hami6l''iyri abava"
hacSma I martiya Arxa nama [Arm]ini-79)ya Halditahya pu6l'-a
hauv udapatata Biibii-auvDubala nama [da]hya-80)us haca avadasa
bauv [k]arahya ava6ia adurujiya adam Nabukud-81)racara amiy
Nabunaitahya pu^'a pasava kara Babiruviya hacama ha-82)mi-
^'iya abava abiy avam Arxam asiyava Babirum hauv agarbayat-
83)a hauv xsaya^iya abava Babirauv
15. Ositij Da[rayava]u[s xs]aya6'i-84:)ya pasava adam karam
fraisayam Babirum Vi°dafar[na] nama Pa[rsa] mana 85)ba°daka
avamsam ma^istam akunavam ava^asam afebam para[ita ava]m
karam 86)Babiruvi[ya]m^ jata hya mana naiy [gajubataiy* pasa-
va [V]i°da[farn]a hada kar-87)a asiyava Babirum Auramaz-
damaiy upast[am] a[bara] vasna Auramaz-88)daha Vi°da[far]na
Babiruvi[y]a aja"' uta [basta anaya]** + + + + + + + mahya XXII
ra-89)ucabis [fekajta aha° ava^a avam A[rxam hya Nabukujdra-
cara a-90)gauba[ta' ut]a martiya tya i + + + + nusi + + + 4. +
91)+ + + + + + [hauv Arxa u]ta [martjiya t[yaisaiy f]rata[m]a
a[n]-92)[u]si[y]a aha^ta Babira[u]v [uzmay]apatiy akariya^ta^"
Col. 4.
I. l)^atiy Daraya[vaus] xsayaSiya ima t-2)ya mana kartam
[Babiraujv
iam[uea], KT. Wrongly mafl[ista], ed.
^avapara, KT.
'atiya[i]sa, ed. See voc.
^t[ya]iy, KT. See voc.
''babivuvi[ya]m, KT. Wrongly babirauv, ed.
•• [gajubataly, KT. [gajubataiy, ed.
'bablruvi[y]ri aja^ KT. Wrongly babirum agarbilya, ed.
8 [basta anaya], Tolman.
"11. 90-91, a-90)gauba[ta ut]a martiya tyai[saiy fratama a]nusiya [aha""-
ta agarbaya pa]-91)sava [niyajstayam, AVeissbach. See voc. s. v. kar.
w akariyaota, Bartholomae, WB". asariyata, KT. akariyaotam, WB'.
See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 23
13. Says Darius the king: Afterwards the province became
mine; this (is) what (was) done by me in Arachosia.
14. Says Darius the king: When I was in Persia and in Me-
dia, a second time the Babylonians became estranged from me;
one man, Arkha by name, an Armenian son of Haldita, he rose
up in Babylon; there (is) a region, Dubala by name — from here
he thus lied to the people; I am Kebuchadrezzar, the son of
Nabu-na'id; afterwards the Babylonian people became estranged
from me (and) went over to that Arkha; he seized Babylon; he
became king in Babylon.
15. Says Darius the king: Afterwards I sent forth my army
to Babylon; Intaphernes by name, a Persian, my subject, him I
made chief of them; thus I said to them; go, smite that Baby-
lonian army which does not call itself mine; afterwards Inta-
phernes with an army went to Babylon; Ahura Mazda bore me
aid; by the grace of Ahura Mazda Intaphernes smote the Baby-
lonians; and [he led them bound to me]; 22 days in the month
+ + + +^ were completing their course — then that Arkha, who
called himself Nebuchadrezzar, and the men who [were his fore-
most allies they seized and bound] ;^ [this Arkha] and what men
were his foremost allies were put on the cross at Babylon.
Col. 4.
1. Says Darius the king: This (is) what was done by me in
Babylon.
2. Says Darius the king: This (is) what I did; by the grace
of Ahura Mazda in the same year^ after that I became king I
iThe Elam. version gives the month Markazanash.
2 Supplied from Elam. version; see voc. akariyaHa, s. v. kar.
sWeissbach's interfiretation (see voc. s. v. ferd) is very probable, yet I
would note the following objections: l)The lacuna before Bab. moanna.
fits gab-bi, all, very well; of. Oppert's old interpretation, clans toute I'anne,
toujours, dans toute ma vie, to which I would add Turfan MSS. hdv-silr,
eius modi. So KT, always. 2 The omission of the det. an (which invaria-
bly occurs in expressions of time) from the corresponding Elam. phrase.
3)The congestion of all these recorded events in one year. Weissbach
in a personal letter to me (quoted in voc.) would avoid this difficulty
by supposing that Darius' words^are not literally true here; that the re-
bellions broke out in one and the same year but putting them down re-
quired a longer time, a difficult explanation when we read the express
words of the king who is recording what he, not others, accomplished.
24 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
2. 6atiy D-3)arayavaus xs[aya6i]ya ima tya adam akuna-i)vaiii
vasnii Aura[mazd]ahai hamahyaya fer-5)da pasava yafe x[saya-
6iya] abavam XIX hamaraii-6)a akunavam vasn[a Aarajmazdaha.
adamsim^ a-7)ianam uta IX xs[aya^iy]a agarbayam I Gaumata
8)nama magus aha [hauv adjurujiya avafe afeha adam 9)Bardiya
amiy [hya Kiijraus pu6"'a hauy Parsam ha-10)mi6''iyam akunau[s
I A^"'i]na nama XJvajiya hauv adu-ll)rujiya avafe a[feha adam]
xsaya^iya amiy Uvajaiy 12)hauy Uvajam ha[mi^'iya]m akunaus
[majna [I Na]di°tabaira n-13)ama Babiruviya hauv adurujiya
ava^a afeha 14r)adam Nabiikudra[cara amiy] hya Nabunaitahya
pu^'a 15)hauv Babirum [hamiJS'iyam akunaus I Martiya na-
16)ma Parsa hauv [ad]u[ru]']iya ava^a afeha adam Liiani-17)s
amiy Uvajai[y xsaya]^iya hauv Uvajam hami5''iya-18)m akunaus
I Fi'avar[ti]s nama Mada hauv adurujiya 19)avate aOaha. a[da]m
[X]sa[fe]ita amiy Uvaxstrahya taumay-20)a hauv Madam [hami-
6'iyam] akunaus I Ci^'a^taxma nama Asa-21)gartiya hauv [adu]-
rujiya ava^a a^aha adam xsaya^-22)iya amiy Asaga[rtaiy] Uvaxs-
trahya taumaya hauv 23)Asagartam hami^'^iljam] akunaus I
Frada nama 24)Margava hauv a[d]u[r]ujiya ava^a afeha adam
25)x8aya^iya a[miy Mar]gauv hauv Margum hami^"'i-26)yam
akunaus [I Vahya]zdata nama Parsa hauv a-27)durujiya ava[^a
afeha] adam Bardiya amiy hya Kii-28)raus puS'a ha[uv Parjsam
hami^^'iyam akunaus I Ar-29)xa nama Armin[iya hauv] adurujiya
avate afeha adam Nab-30)ukudracara amiy [hya ]Sfabu]naitahya
pu^'a hauv Babirum ham-31)i^'iyam akunaus
3. ^a[t]iy Darayavaus xsaya^iya im^iy 32)IX xsayaSiya [ada]m
agarbayam a'^tar ima hamarana
4. 33)6atiy Daraya[vaus xsa]ya6iya dahyava ima tya hamifl'^iy-
34)a abava" drauga di[s hami6'iy]a akunaus tya imaiy karam
adur-35)ujiyasa'' pasava di[s Auramaz]da mana dastaya akunaus
ya^a mam k-36)ama avafe di[s akunavam]
5. 6a,tij Darayavaus xsaya^i-37)ya tuvam ka x[saya6iya h]ya
aparam^ Shy* haca drauga darsam 38)patipayauva mart[iya hya
draujjana ahatiy avam ufrastam^ parsa ya-39)diy ava^a man[iya-
bay]" dahyausmaiy duruva ahati-40)y
• ■' aura[miizd]aha, WB." a[uramazdaha] aha, ed.
^adamsim, KT. Wrongly adamsdm, ed.
^ apara-ma, Bartholomae. See voc.
^ahy, ed., KT., wrongly in all places. See voc
1^ uf rastam, KT. See voc.
6ma[niyahy], ed.
PMBSIAN TEXT,S TRANSLATED 35
engaged in 19 battles; by the grace of Ahura Mazda I waged
them and 1 seized 9 Idngs; there was one, Gaumata by name, a
Magian; he lied; thus he said; I am Bardiya the son of Cyrus;
he made Persia rebellious; there (was) one, A6i'ina by name, a
Susian; he lied; thus he said; I am king in Susiana; he made
Susiana rebellious to me; there (was) one, Mdintu-Bel by name,
a Babylonian; he lied; thus he said; I am Nebuchadrezzar the
son of Nabu-na'id; he made Babylon rebellious; there (was) one,
Martiya by name, a Persian; he lied; thus he said; I am Iman-
ish, king in Susiana; he made Susiana rebellious; there (was)
one, Phraortes by name, a Mede; he lied; thus he said; I am
Khshathrita, of the family of Cyaxares; he made Media rebel-
lious; there (was) one, Ci^''a(n)takhma by name, in Sagartia; he
lied; thus he said; I am king in Sagartia, of the family of Cy-
axares; he made Sagartia rebellious; there (was) one, Frada by
name, a Margian; he lied; thus he said; I am king in Margiana;
he made Margiana rebellious; there (was) one, Vahyazdata by
name, a Persian; he lied; thus he said; I am B'lrdiya the son of
Cyrus; he made Persia rebellious; there (was) one, Arkha by
name, an Armenia.n ; he lied; thus he said; I am Nebuchadrezzar
the son of Nabu-na'id; he made Babylon rebellious.
3. Says Darius the king: These 9 kings I seized within these
battles.
4. Says Darius the king: These (are) the provinces which
became rebellious; the Lie made them rebellious so that these
deceived the people; afterwards Ahura Mazda gave them into
my hand; as was my will so [I did] unto them.
5. Says Darius the king: O thou who shalt be king in the fu-
ture, protect thyself strongly from Deceit; whatever man shall
be a deceiver,*^ him well punished, punish, if thus thou shalt
think " may my country be secure."
6. Says Darius the king: This (is) what I did; by the grace
of Ahura Mazda I did (it) in the same year; O thou who shalt
examine this inscription in the future, let it convince thee^ (as
to) what* (was) done by me; regard it not as lies.
7. Says Darius the king: Ahura Mazda is my surety that this
(is) true (and) not false (which) I did in the same year.
iCf. TurfanMSS., drozaniy.
2Cf. Turf an MSS., n6 varovAd, is not believed; par varnii, by belief,
Neutest. Bruchstiioke in soghdischer Sprache.
26 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
6. O'dtij Da[raya]va[u8] xsaya^iya ima tya adam akunavam
41)vasna Auramazdaha [ha]ma[h]yaya ferda akunavam tuvam
ka hya 4:2)aparam imam dipi[m] patiparsahy tya mana kartam
varnavatam 'i3)^uvam matya [draujjiyahy^
7. Batij Darayavaus xsa-4:J-)yai9iya Auramazd[am upava]r-
taiy^"^ yate ima hasiyam naiy duru-4:5)xtam adam akuna[vam
hamajhyaya ferda
8. 6atiy Darayavaus xsaya-i6)^iya vasna Aura[mazdaha ap]i-
maiy ani3'-asciy vasiy astiy karta-4:7)m ava aiiyaya d[i]p[iy]a naiy
nipistam avahyaradiy naiy n-4:8)ipistam mat[ya hya apa]ram
imam dipim patiparsatiy avah-49)ya paruv fe[daya'' tya] mana
kartam nais[im] ima" varnavataiy d-50)uruxtam maniya[taiy]^
9. ^atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya tyaiy 51)paruva xsaya6[iya
y]ata aha° avaisfim ava naiy astiy kar-52)tam ya^a mana va[sna]
Auramazdiiha hamahyaya ferda kartam
10. ^a-53)tiy Darayavaus x[sa]ya6iya nuram^ ^uvam varnav-
atam tya man-5-i)a kartam avate ka[rahya 6]a[hy avahyajradiy'
ma apagaudaya yadiy imam 55)ha°dugam naiy [a]pa[gau]da[yah]y
Icarahya ^ahy Auramazda 6uvam 56)dausta biya uta[ta]iy tauma
vasiy bIya uta dargani jiva
11. 57)6atiy Darayavaus [xsaya]6iya yadiy imam ha"dugam
apagaudaya-58)hy naiy Oahj [k]ara[hya] Auramazdatay jata biya
utataiy taum-59)a ma bIya
12. 6atiy Darayavaus xlaya^iya ima tya adam akunavam
60)hamahyaya ferda [vasnja Auramazdaha akunavam Auramaz-
damaiy upas-6l)1:rim abara uta an[iyaha bajgaha tyaiy ha'^tiy
13. ftltiy Darayavau-62)s xsaya^iya avah[ya]ra[diy] Auramaz-
da upastam abara utii ani-63)yaha bagaha tyai[y ha'^tiy ya6]a
naiy arai[ka] aham naiy draujana fiham na-64)iy ziirakara aham
1 [dranjjiyahy, Bartholomae. [durujjiyfiliy, KT, WB". [duruxtam
man]iyilhy, ed.
^Dittography for anramazd [am npavajrtaiy, Tolman. See voc. au-
ramazda +,+ ^_ ++ rtaiyiya, KT. auramaz[diya] taiyiya, WB. aurama-
zd[a va]rtiyaiy, Bartholomae.
^Sadayii, Bartholomae. fed" 4. +, Jn. fla[dutiy], KT. See voc.
•'nais[im] ima, Tolman. nais[aiy] ima, Weissbach. nais + + im, KT.
^maniy [atiy], ed.
^nuram, KT, Jn. + + + nuram, ed. wrongly.
'sa + + + 4,d + + + + + adiy, KT. ka[rahya 6]a[hy avaliya]radiy, Tol-
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 27
8. Says Darius the king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda much
else (was) done by me that (is) not written^ on this inscription;
for this reason it (is) not written lest whoever shall examine
this inscription in the future, to him what has been done by me
should seem too much; and it should not convince him, but he
should think (it) false.
9. Says Darius the king: Who were the former kings, while
they lived, by these nothing (was) thus done as (was) done by
me through the grace of Ahura Mazda in the same year.
10. Says Darius the king: Now let it convince thee (as to)
what (was) done by me; thus [tell it to the people];^ do not con-
ceal (it); if thou shalt not conceal this record (but) tell (it) to the
people, may Ahura Mazda be a friend to thee and may there
be unto thee a family abundantly and mayest thou live long.
11. Says Darius the king: If thou shalt conceal this record
(and) not tell (it) to the people, may Ahura Mazda be a smiter
unto thee and may there not be unto thee a family.
12. Says Darius the king: This (is) what I did in the same
year; by the grace of Ahura Mazda I did (it); Ahura Mazda
bore me aid and the other gods which are.
13. Says Darius the king: For this reason Ahura Mazda bore
me aid and the other gods which are, because I was not an
enemy, I was not a deceiver, I was not a wrong-doer, neither I
nor my family; according to rectitude [I ruled] nor against the
slave(?) nor the lowly(?) did I exercise oppression;' the man who
helped my house, him well esteemed, I esteemed; (the man) who
would destroy it, him well punished, I punished.
14. Says Darius the king: O thou who shalt be king in the
future, whatever man shall be a deceiver or whoever shall be a
1 Cf . nlpis, write, Neutest. Bruckstiicke in soghdischer Sprache, Miiller,
SB AW, 1907; New Pers. nivesarf.
21 would read avafla ka[rahya 6]a[hy avahya]radiy, tell it thus to the
people; for this reason, which can fit the few traces of characters on the
rock. Since KT do not give the extent of the lacuna, I feel some doubt
whether the space justifies the supplement of the last word. KT however
read the Elam. as hu[pentukkime], wherefore. I would add that my read-
ing is in full accord with Weissbaoh's emendation of the Bab. version, u
amat kit- turn a-na u-ku ki-[bi?], and declare{'}) the true record to the people,
ZDMG, 61, 739.
»Seevoc. s. v, + + + t^n^uvt'^m''
28 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
[naiy a]da[m najimaiy tauma upariy arstami upariy-65)[axsa-
yaiyP naiy sakauri[m8 naiy] + + t"n'^uT'^'ta«* zura akunavam
martiya hya hamata-66)xsata mana v'6ii[ya a]vam ubartam
a[ba]ram hya viyana[sa]ya* avam ufrasta-67)m aparsam
14. 6atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya tuvam [ka] xsaya^a 68)hya
aparam" ahy martiya [hya] draujana ahatiy hyava [zu]rakara++^
ahat-69)iy avaiy ma dausta [biy]a* ufrastadiy parsa
15. ^atiy Dai-a-70)yavaus xsayaSiya [tujvam ka hya aparam
imam dipim vainahy ty-7l)am adam niyapi[ia]m [ijmaiva pati-
kara matya vikanahy^ yava d''(?)-72)t''s''(?)i'' ahy avafesta" par-
i[ba]ra^^
16. ^atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya ya-73)[diy] imam di[pim]
vaina[hy] imaiva patikara naiydis vikanahy' uta-74)taiy yava
tauma [ahatiy] paribarahQdis^' Auramazda ^uvam dausta bly-
75)a utataiy tau[ma] vasiy bl[y]a uta dargam jlva uta tya kuna-
vahy 76)avataiy Auramazda [ukarta]mi* kimautuv
17. 6atiy Darayavaus xsa-77)ya0iya yadiy im[a]m dipim i-
maiva patikara vainahy vikanah(i)dis^^ ut-78)ataiy yava tau[m]a
ahati[y nai]ydis paribarahy^^ Auramazdataiy jata b-79)iya uta-
taiy taum[a ma biya] uta tya kunavahy avataiy Auramazd-80)a
nika"tuv
1 8. fetiy Da[ra]yavaus xsaya^iya imaiy martiya tyaiy 81)ada-
kaiy avada [a]ha°ta yata adam Gaumatam tyam magum avaja-
nam 82)hya Bardiya aga[uba]ta adakai[y] imaiy martiya hama-
taxsa^ta anusiya man-83)a Vi"dafarna na[ma] Va[ya]sp[ara]hya
pu^''a Par[sa U]ta[na n]ama ®axrah[y]a 84:)[pu6''a] Parsa [Gaubr]u-
larstiim, Foy, Jn., KT. See voc.
= upariy [ayam], ed., upariy [axsayaiy], Tolman. See voc.
's»k»ur='i[m»], KT. s'k''ur''i(?)mi', Jn. See voc.
^ t^nouvt^m", KT. iii»ii''uv'>t»m», Jn. See voc.
* viyana[sa]ya, KT. viyana[6a]ya, Foy.
" apara-ma, Bartholomae.
'[zujrakara, KT, Miiller, Foy. See voc.
8[bly]a (Opt. 3 sg.), Tolman, Weissbacli. + + + a, KT.
sivikaniihy, Jn. visanahy, KT. See voc.
i''da(?)tas(?) ahy, KT. amata ahy, Tolman. tava ahy, Hoffmann-Kutschke.
" avafla sta, Hoffmann-Kvitschke.
12 pari[ ba]ra, KT. Wrongly parikara, ed. See voc.
13 wrongly parikarah[i]dis, ed.
"[ukarta]m, Tolman. [vazarka]m, Oppert, Foy. See voc
"vikanah[i]dis, Jn. visanahadis, KT.
w -wrongly parikariihy, ed.
PERSIAN TEXTH TRANSLATED 29
wrong-doer (be) not a friend to these; punish (them) with severe
punishment.
15. Says Darius the king: O thou who shalt see this inscrip-
tion in the future which I have written or these -sculptures,
thou shalt not destroy (them) as long as thou shalt be powerf ul( ?) ;
thus thou shalt guard them.
16. Says Darius the king: If thou shalt see this inscription or
these sculptures (and) shalt not destroy them and shalt guard
them as long as thy family^ shall be, may Ahura Mazda be a
friend to thee and may there be unto thee a family abundantly
and mayest thou live long and whatever thou shalt do, this for
thee (let) Ahura Mazda make [successful].
17. Says Darius the king: If thou shalt see this inscription or
these sculptures (and) shalt destroy them and shalt not guard
them as long as thy family shall be, may Ahura Mazda be a
smiter unto thee and may there not be unto thee a family and
whatever thou shalt do, this let Ahura Mazda destroy for thee.
18. Says Darius the king: These (are) the men who were
there then when I slew Gaumftta the Magian, who called himself
Bardiya; then these men cooperated as my allies; Intaphernes
by name, the son of Vayaspara, a Persian; Otanes by name, the
son of Thukhra, a Persian; Gobryas by name, the son of Mar-
donius, a Persian; Hydarnes by name, the son of Bagabigna, a
Persian; Megabyzus by name, the son of Datuhya, a Persian;
Ardumanish by name, the son of Vahauka, a Persian.
19. Says Darius the king: O thou who shalt be king in the
future, preserve [the family of] these men.
20. Says Darius the king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda this
inscription 4. + + + which I made + + + + + + + + + I have
written; this inscription + + + me afterwards the inscription
+ + + + +
throughout the provinces + the people.^
iHere and in the following section Bartholomae renders tanma, by
power (i. e. as long as will be possible), connecting the word with the root
*tu, to be strong, Av. tu. Cf. Toy. KZ. 35, 47; WZKM. 34, 388; Bang.
ZDMG. 43, 533; Reichelt, KZ. 39, 74. The Elam. translates the word by
patta, which Foy. interprets possibility. See voc. s. v. tanman.
2 For Hoffimann-Kutschke's interpretation of Elam. version (Bh. L.) cf .
Or. Lit. Ztg., Sept., 1906; also Jensen, ZDMG, 55.
30 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
va nama Marduniyahya [pu6''a] pP]arsa [Vi]darna nama Ba-
85)g[a]bignah[ja pju^'a Parsa Ba[gab]uxsa nama [Datujhyahya
pu^^a Parsa 86)Ar[duma]n[is nama] Vahau[kahya p]a6'a Parsa
19. ^atiy Darayavaus xsaya6-87)iya tuvam \ka] xsaya[^]iya
hya aparam^ ahy tyam imaisam martiya u-88)+ + + + + + imam
+ + + a + + + + par[ibar]a^
20. 6atiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya vasna [A]u-89)[ramaz]da[ha]
i[jam] dipi + + + j. + [tyjam^ akunavam + + tisam a^. + a + +t +
avast-90)[a]ya[m] + + + + axar + + + + [niyap]isam iya [djipi + 4. +
nam afehavaja + + + + is + + + + ada 91)+ j. + + + m uta + + + + i
+ +i + + 'ta+ + + taiy + 4. + + ya + i + iya ma[m] pasava ima
d-92)ipi + + + ima + + + avata + + + + + + + + a"tar dahya[va
k]ara hama amaxamata*
Col. 5.
1. l)6at[iy D]arayava[us xjsaya^iya 2)ima t[ya ada]m aku[na-
vam]+ + + + tiya a + +-3)mca ^''[itiyam]* ferdam + ^ [pasava ya]5a
xsaya-4)^iya [abavam U]vaja [nama dajhyaus hau-5)v ha-
[cama hami^'iya] abava [I martiya] + mamaita nama U-6)vaji[ya
avam ma6]ista[m akunava°]ta pasava ada-7)m ka[ram fraisa]yam
U[va]"am I martiya] Gaubruva 8)nama [Parsa man]a ba'^daka
[avamsam] ma^istam aku-9)navam pa[sava hauv Gaujbruva [hada
kar]a asiyava 10)UTajam [hamaranam a]kuna[us hada] Uvajiyai-
bis" pas-ll)ava Ga[ubr]uva + + + + + + [av]aia° uta daiy' marda
12)uta [tyamsam]* ma0[istam] agarbaya anaya abi-13)y ma[m
utasi]m ada[m ava]janam pasava dahya-14)us [mana abava]
2. Oat[ij Da]rayavaus xsaya5i-15)ya a[dakaiy Uvai]iya [atar-
1 apara-ma, Bartholomae. See voo.
2 tyam imaisam martiyana-88)m taumam [iibart]a[m] par[ibar]a, Weiss-
bach.
3 [ariy]am, WB".
4 [kjara hama amaxahyatii, Weissbach. See voc. 11. 88-90 are supposed
to correspond to Elam. Bh.L. referring to duplicate copies sent to all lands.
Cf. fragment BE. 8627 found by Dr. Koldewey at Babylon = Bh. 55-58;
69-73.
« 0"-[itiyam], WB"., better read ^'[itiyam]. KT record traces of first char-
acter as e' or p; the latter might be initial of Persian word tov fifth.
Ouvajiyaibis, KT. hamifl-iyaibis, ed. wrongly
' uta daiy, KT. uta sis, Tolman. utasim, Foy.
8[tyamsam], WBn.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 31
Col. 5.
1. Says Darius the king: This (is) what I did [in the third?]
year [when I became] king; (there is) a province Susiana [by
name]; this became estranged from me; [one man] + + + mam-
aita by name, a Susian, him they made chief; afterwards I sent
forth (my) army to Susiana; [one man] Gobryas by name, [a
Persian] my subject, [him] I made chief [of them]; afterwards
this Gobryas with an army went to Susiana; he engaged in
[battle] with the Susians; afterwards Gobryas smote + + + and
annihilated them (?) and seized their chief and brought him to
me and I slew him; afterwards the province [became mine].
2. Says Darius the king: Then the Susians [feared] and Ahura
Mazda gave them [into my hand]; I offered thanks; by the grace
of Ahura Mazda, as was my will, thus I did unto them.
3. Says Darius the king: Whoever shall worship Ahura
Mazda, as long as [his family] shall be, and life + + + + + +
4. Says Darius the king: With (my) army I went to Scythia;
unto Scythia + + + + the Tigris^ + + + + + + + + + + unto
the sea + + + I crossed in rafts ( ?); the Scythians I smote; one
part I seized [and they were brought] bound to me and [I slew]
them; + + + Sku(n)kha by name, him I seized + + + + there
another I made chief as was my will; afterwards the province
became mine.
5. Says Darius the king: + + + + + not Ahura Mazda + + + +
I gave thanks to Ahura Mazda; by the grace of Ahura Mazda,
as was my [will, thus] I did unto them.
6. Says Darius the king: [Whoever] unto Ahura Mazda shall
give worship [as long as his family shall be] + + +
Bh. a.
Persiam, and Elmiite ovm^ the figure of king Darius; Bahy Io-
nian wanting.
I. I (am) Darius, the great king, king of kings, king in Per-
sia, king of the countries, the son of Hystaspes, the grandson
01 Arsames, the Achaemenide.
1 KT's record, sakam, mates hardly possible Foy's attractive supple-
ment; see voc. s. v. tigra.
32 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
sa°]^ uta[s]am Aurama-16)zda [mana dastaya] a[lcunaus] ayadaiy
vasna A-17)uraina[zdaha ya^a] ma[ni kama aha avajfedis aku-
navam
3. 18)^[atiy Daraya]vaus [xsaya^Jiya hya Auramazda-19)m
ya[dataiy]2 ya[va tauma a]hatiy uta ilvah-20)ya + + + + + + + + + +
ya + +
4. [6ati]y Darayavaul xs-21)aya[%a hada kar]a Sa[kam' adam
as]iyavam abiy Sak-22)am + + + + + + + + i+ + + + + + m Tigram
b^r=1;^-23)y''* + + + + + + + + ++ + + + + + iya abiy draya^ a-24)va
+ + + + + + + + i>'li + + + + + + a pisa viyatara-25)yam + + + + + + + +
Sak[a avjajanam^ aniyam aga-26)rb[ayam + + + + + bajsta [anayata
a]biy mam ut-27)ai[im avajanam] + + sn + + + + S[ku°]xa nama
avara aga-28)rb[ayam] + + + + j + + + + ^+ avada aniyam ma^-
29)is[tam akjunavam ya[6a mam k]ama' aha pasava da-30)h[yaus
ma]na [abajva
5. [^ati]y Darayavaus xsaya-31)6i[ya] +4. + + +s++a+ + + + 4.
j^a naiy Auramazd-32)a + + i + + [A]ura[mazdam ajyadaiy^ vasna
Aurama-33)z[daha ya^a n:]am [kama aha ava^adijs akunavam
6. ^at-34)i[y Darayavaus xs]a[yaffiya hya] Auramazdam'
yadata-35)i[y yava] tLauma ahatiy^" u]ta jivahya uta 36)+ + + +
++++++
Bh. a.
1. l)Adam Darayavaus xsaya^iya vazarka xsaya-2)6iya xsaya-
^iyanam xsaya^iya Parsaiy xs-3)aya^iya dahyunam V^staspa-
hya pu^'a 4)Arsamahya napa Haxamanisiya
2. .tetiy Dara-5)yavaus xsayaWya mana pita V'staspa V-
6)sta8pahya pita Arsama Arsamahya pi-7)ta Ariyaramna Ariya-
ramnahya pita 8)Cispis Cispais pita Haxamanis
3. 9) tetiy Darayavaus xsaya^iya avahya-10)radiy vayam Haxa-
iCatarsa"], KT.
2ya[dataiy], Tolman.
3 [hada kur]a sa[k;im], KT.
■•sakii t[yaiy hanmavargri utii tyaiy xauda]m tigram baraiit[i]y, Foy, but
text confirmed by KT.
'daraya, KT. daraj'am, ed. wrongly. See too.
*sak[iya avjajanam, KT.
'ya + + +[n]ama, KT.
8 [a]ura[mazdam a]yadaiy, Tolman. + + ura + + [a]yadaiy, WB".
*[hya] auramazdrim, WB".
M [uta yava] t[auma ahatiy], WB".
PERSIAN TEXTS- TRANSLATED 33
2. Says Darius the king: My father (is) Hystaspes; the father
of Hystaspes (is) Arsames; the father of Arsames (is) Ariaram-
nes; the father of Ariaramnes (is) Teispes; the father of Teispes
(is) Achaemenes.
3. Says Darius the king: Therefore we are called Achaemen-
ides; from long ago we have been of ancient lineage; from long
ago our family have been kings.
4. Says Darius the king: 8 of my family (there were) who
were formerly kings; I am the ninth (9); long aforetime we are
kings.
Bh. b.
Persian, Ma?nite, Babylonian tmder prostrate for ui.
This Gaumata the Magian lied; thus he said: I am Bardiya,
the son of Cyrus; I am king.
Bh. c.
Persian, Elamite over first standing figure; Babylonian lelow.
This Ae'^ina lied; thus he said: I am king in Susiana.
Bh. d.
Persian, Elamite over second stomding figure; Babylonian below.
This Nidintu-Bel lied; thus he said: I am Nebuchadrezzar, the
son of NabtL-na'id; I am king in Babylon.
Bh. e.
Elamite above third standing figure; Persian on the garment;
Babylonian below.
This Phraortes lied; thus he said: I am Khshathrita of the
family of Cyaxares; I am king in Media.
Bh. f.
Persian, Elamite above fourth standing figure; Babylonian
below.
This Martiya lied; thus he said: I am Imanish, king in Su-
siana.
Bh. g.
Persian, Elamite above fifth standing figure; Babylonianbelow.
This Ci6'^a(n)takhma lied; thus he said: I am king in Sagartia,
of the family of Cyaxares.
3
34 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
manisiya fehya-ll)mahy haca paruviyata a[m]ata 12)amahy
haca paruviyata hya ama-13)xam tauma xsaya^iya aha
4. te-14:)tiy Darayavaus xsaya%a VIII ma-15)na taumaya
tyaiy paruva-16)m xsayaffiya aha" adam iia-17)vama IX duvita-
paranami vayam x-18)saya^iya amahy
Bh. b.
l)Iyam Gauma-2)ta hya magus a-3)durujiya 4:)a.Ya.0a. afeha
adam Ba-5)rdiya amiy hya K-6)uraus pu^i'a adam xs-7)aya6iiya
amiy
Bh. c.
l)Iyam A.6'-2)ma, adu-3)rujiya 4)avai9a 5)afeha a-6)dam x-7)sa-
ya^-8)iya am-9)iy U-10)vajaiy
Bh. d.
l)Iyam Nadi'^tabaira 2)adurujiya ava-3)^a afeha adam Nab-
4)ukudracara ami-5)y hya Nabunaita-6)hya pu^''a adam x-7)sa-
ya^iya amiy B-8)abirauv
Bh. e.
l)Iyam Fra-2)vartis 3)aduru-4)jiya ava-5)te afeha adam 6)Xla-
fo-ita amiy 7)Uvaxstrahya 8)taumaya adam 9)xsaya6iya amiy
10)Ma-H)daiy
Bh. f.
l)Iyam Martiya a-2)durujiya a-3)ya6a afeha a-4)dam Imanis
am-5)iy Uvajaiy x-6)saya^i-7)ya
Bh. g.
l)lyahi Ci^''a°-2)taxma ad-3)urujiya 4)avate a-5)feha adam
6)xsaya6i-7)ya Asaga-8)rtaiy Uva-9)xltrahya 10)taumay-ll)a^
Bh. h.
l)Iyam Vahya-2)zdata adu-3)rujiya ava-4)^a afeha ada-5)m
Bardiya a-6)miy hya K-7)uraus pu6''a S)adam xsa-9)ya6iya amiy
Bh. i.
l)Iyam Arxa 2)aduruj-3)iya ava^a 4)afeha adam 5)Nabuku[d]-
ra-6)cara amiy 7)hya Nabuna-8)itahya pu-9)^'a adam xsa-10)ya-
6iya amiy ll)Bab[i]rauv
'duvitaparanaro. See critical note to Bh. 1, 1. 10.
2 Reading of KT's cuneiform text. Their transliteration, however, has
ami-8)y asaga-9)rtaiy uva-10)xstrahj'a ll)taumay-12)a.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 35
Bh. h.
Persian, Elamite above sixth standing figure; Babylonian belaw.
This Vahyazdata lied; thus he said: I am Bardiya, the son of
Cyrus; I am king.
Bh. i.
Persian, Elamite above seventh standing figure; Babylonian
below.
This Arkha lied; thus he said: I am Nebuchadrezzar, the son
of Nabii-na'id; I am king in Babylon.
Bh. j.
Persian, Elamite above eighth standing figv/re; Babylonian
below.
This Frada lied; thus he said: I am king in Margiana.
Bh. k.
Persian, Elamite above ninth standing figure.
This (is) Sku(n)kha, the Scythian.
INSCRIPTIONS OF PERSEPOLIS
Dar. Pars. a.
071 the doorposts of the taca/ra, above sculpture of the hing; Per-
sian, Elamite, Babylonian.
Darius the great king, king of kings, king of the countries,
the son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide, Avho built this tacara.
Dar. Pets. b.
On the garment of the hing.
Darius the gi-eat king, the son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide.
Dar. Pars. c.
Repeated on the windotv cornice.
Stone window cornice made in the royal house of King Darius.
36 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
Bh. j.
Dlyam Frada 2)aduru-3)jiya ava^a afeha 4:)adam xsaya0-5)iya
amiy Marga-6)uv
Bh. k.
l)Iyam Sku°-2)xa hya Saka
INSCRIPTIONS OF PERSEPOLIS
Dar. Pers. a.
l)Darayavaul xsaya^iya 2)vazarka xsaya^iya xsa-3)ya6iyanain
xsaya^iya 4)dahyunani Vistaspahy-5)a pu^''a Haxamanisiya
h-6)ya imam tacaram akunaus
Dar. Pers. b.
Dai'ayavaus Xo vazarka Vistaspahya pu^'a Haxamanisiya
Dar. Pers. c.
Ardastana afe"gaina Darayavahaul XShya vi^iya karta
Dar. Pers. d.
1. l)Auramazda vazarka hya ma^ilta bag-2)anam hauv Dara-
yavaum xsaya6'i-3)yam adada hausaiy xsa^'am fraba-4:)ra vasna
Auramazdahil Darayavau-5)s xlaya^iya
2. fetiy Dilrayavaus 6)xsaya5iya iyam dahyaus Par-7)sa tyam
mana Auramazda f rriba-8)ra hya nailjfi uvaspa umarti-9)ya vasna
Auramazdaha manac-10)a Darayavahaul xsaya^iyahy-ll)a haca
aniyana naiy tarsat-12)iy
3. 6atiy Darayavaus xsaya-13)^iya mana Auramazda upastam
14)baratuv hadil viS^ibis bagai-15)bis uta imam dahyaum Aura-
16)mazda patuv haca hainay-17)a haca dusiyarfi^ haca dra-18)uga
abiy^ imam dahyaum mil 19)a]'amiya ma ha[i]na ma dus-20)iya-
jam' [m]a drauga aita adam 21)}fanam'' jadiyamiy'' Auramazd-
Mnsiyara, Jn.
^ubiy, Stolze.
^ dusiyfiram, Jn.
*yanam, Jn. Wrongly yan + + m, ed. Stolze's Phot, shows defect in
stone, not lacuna.
*jadiya[m]iy, Stolze's Phot, jadiyamiy, Jn. See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 37
I.
Dar. Pers. d.
On the south retaining wall of terrace.
The great Ahura Mazda, who (is) the greatest of the gods/
he made Darius king; he gave him the kingdom; by the grace
of Ahura Mazda Darius (is) king.
2. Says Darius the king: This (is) the country Persia which
Ahura Mazda gave me, which, beautiful, possessing good horses,
possessing good men, by the grace of Ahura Mazda and (by the
achievements) of me Darius the king, does not fear an enemy.
3. Says Darius the king: Let Ahura Mazda bear me aid with
the royal^ gods and let Ahura Mazda protect this country from
an evil host, from famine,^ from Deceit; may not an evil host
nor famine nor Deceit come upon this country; this favor I
pray of Ahura JMazda with the royaP gods; this let Ahura Mazda
give me with the royaP gods.
Dar. Pers. e.
On the south retaining wall of terrace.
1. I (am) Darius the great king, kiog of kings, king of many
countries, the son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide.
2. Says Darius the king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda these
(are) the countries which I have brought into my possession with
the help of this Persian army, (and) which feared me (and)
brought to me tribute; Susiana, Media, Babylonia, Arabia, As-
syria, Egypt, Armenia, Cappadocia, Sparda, the lonians who
(are) of the main land (and) those who (are) on the sea, and the
countries which (are) on the east, Sagartia, Parthia, Drangiana,
Aria, Bactria, Sogdiana, Chorasmia, Sattagydia, Arachosia,
India, Ga(n)dara, Scythia, the Macae.
3. Says Darius the king: If thus thou shalt think, "May I
not fear an enemy," protect this Persian people; if the Persian
people shall be protected. Welfare for a long time undisturbed
will through Ahura descend upon this royal house.
iCf. Turfan MSS., bagan baglyst6m; also sm;i;t baydm'q 'azunt 'istd,
ye are sons of Ood, Neutest. Bruchstucke in soghdischer Sprache, Miiller,
SBAW, 1907.
2 See voo. s. v. v'iSHb»is''.
^Cf. Turfan MSS., diisydriy, need.
38 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
22)am hada vifii^bis^ bagaibis a-23)i[tamai]y^ [Au]ramazda dadat-
24:)u[v hada vij^'^jbis bagaibis
Dar. Pers. e.
1. l)Adam DarayavauS xsaya^iya vaz-2)arka xsaya^iya xsaya-
ftiyana-3)m xsaya^iya dahyunam tyai-4)sam parunam Vistaspa-
hya 5)pu6''a Haxamanisiya
2. fetiy Dara-6)yavaus xsaya^iya vasna Aurama-7)zdaha ima
dahyava tya adam 8)adarsiy^ hada ana Parsa ka-9)ra tya hacama
atarsa" mana baj-10)im abara'' Uvaja Mada Babiru-ll)s Arabaya
A^ura Mudray-12)a Armina Katpatuka Sparda ya-13)una tyaiy
uskahya uta tya-14)iy drayahya* uta dahyava t-15)ya p''r''u-
j-ys-jiyas Asagarta Parfeva Zra°-16)ka'' Haraiva Baxtris Sug[u]da
IJy-17)arazmiya ©atagus Harauvatis H-18)i°dus Ga°dara Saka
Maka
3. 6atiy 19)DarayaTaus xsaya^iya yadiy 20)ava^a maniyahay^
haca aniya-21)na ma [tajrsam imam Parsam karam padi-22)y
yadiy kara Parsa pata^ ahatiy hya 23)duvais[ta]m siyatis axiata
hauvci-24:)y Aura nirasatiy abiy imam vifem
Xerx. Pers. a [aa, ab, ac, ad].
1. l)Baga vazarka Auramazda hya imam bumim a-2)da hya
avam asmanam ada hya martiyam 3)ada hya siyatim ada marti-
yahya hya 4:)Xsayarsam xsaya^iyam akunaus aivam 5)parmiam
xlaya^iyam aivam parunam fram-6)ataram
2. adam Xsayiirsa xsaya^iya vazarka 7)xsayafflya xlayaftya-
nam xsaya^iya dahy-8)unam' paruv zananfim xsaya^iya ahyay-
9)a}'^ bumiya vazarkaya duraiy apiy Da-10)rayavahaus^^ xsayaft-
yahya puS'a H;lxamanis-ll)iya^^
iviflnbis read viflaibis or viSibis. See voc.
'ai[tamai]y, Jii.
8 adarsiy, Bartliolomae. See voc.
*darayahyii, ed. wrongly.
5 Stone-cutter's blunder for paruvaiy. Jn. records a blank space as oc-
cupying the lacuna; so Westergaard.
^zaraoka, ed.
'maniyahay, Bartholomae. maniyahy, ed.
8 Jn. records traces of the word-divider after pata, where Westergaard
believed was a blank space; cf. Stolze's Phot.
*da-8)hyunam, ac, ad.
I" ahy a-9)ya, ar, ad.
'id-10)arayavahaus, ac, ad.
'^written wrongly foV haxamanisiya. -ll)siya, ac, ad.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 39
Xerx. Pers. a [aa, ab, ac, ad].
Four times repeated on propylaea of Xerxcft^ above the sculptv/red
winged hidh; Pernian, Elamite^ Babylonian.
1. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who created this earth, who
^created yonder heaven, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made Xerxes king, one king of many, one lord
of many.
2. I (am) Xerxes the great king, king of kings, king of the
countries possessing many kinds of people, king of this great
earth far and wide, the son of Darius the king, the Achaemenide.
3. Says Xerxes the great king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda,
this colonnade (for the representatives) of all countries I made;
much else (that is) beautiful (was) done throughout Persia which
I did and which my father did; whatever work seems beautiful,
all that we did by the grace of Ahura Mazda.
4. Says Xerxes the king: Let Ahura Mazda protect me and
my kingdom and what (was) done by me and what (was) done
by my father, (all) this let Ahura Mazda protect.
, Xerx. Pers. b.
On wall beside the magnificent scidptured staircase of the Column
Hall of Xerxes.
1. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who created this earth, who
created yonder heaven, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made Xerxes king, one king of many, one lord of
many.
2. I (am) Xerxes the great king, king of kings, king of the
countries possessing many kinds of people, king of this great
earth far and wide, the son of Darius the king, the Achaemenide.
3. Says Xerxes the great king: What (was) done by me here
and what (was) done by me afar, all this I did by the grace of
Ahura Mazda; let Ahura Mazda protect me with the gods, and
my kingdom and what (was) done by me.
40 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
3. Oatij Xsayarsa xsaya^iya vasna 12)Auramazdaha imam du-
var^im visadahyum^ 13)adam akunavam vasiy aniyasciy naibam^
I4:)kartam ana Parsa tya adam akunavam 15)utamaiy tya pita
akmiaus tyapatiy ka-16)rtam' vainataiy naibam ava visam vasna
A-17)uramazdaha^ akuma
4. fetiy Xsayarsa 18)xsaya5iya^ mam Auramazda patuv uta-
mai-19)y xsa^'am* uta tya mana kartam uta tyamai-20)y pi^'a''
kartam avasciy Auramazda patuv.
Xerx. Pers. b.
1. l)Baga vazarka Auramazda 2)hya imam bumim 3)ada hya
avam asma-i)nam adfi hya martiya-5)m ada hya siyati-6)m ada
martiyahya 7)hya Xsayfirsam xsa-8)yaftyam akunaus ai-9)vam
parunam xiaya^-10)iyam aivam parunam ll)framataram
2. adam X-12)sayar§a xsaya^iya 13)vazarka xsaya^iya xs-
14)aya6iyanam xsaya5-15)iya dahyunam paruvza-16)nanam xsa-
yaftya 17)ahiyaya bumiya va-18)zarkaya duraiy a-19)piy Dara-
yavahaus xs-20)aya6iyahya pu6''a Hax-21)amanisiya
3. tetiy X-22)sayarsa xsaya^iya va-23)zarka tya mana kartam
24)ida uta tyamaiy 25)apataram kartam ava v-26)isam vasna
Auramazda-27)ha akunavam mam Aura-28)mazda patuv hada
ba-29)gaibis utamaiy xsa5'a-30)m uta tyamaiy kartam
Xerx. Pers. ca, cb.^
1. l)[l]Baga vazarka Auramazda hya [2]imam bumim 2)ada
hya [3]avam asmanam ada hya [4]marti-3)yam ada hya siy[5]a-
tim ada martiyahya 4)[6]hya Xsayarlam XSm aku[7]naus aivam
pa-5)runam XS[8]m aivam parunam fram[9]ataram
2. 6)adam Xsayarsa [10]XS vazarka XS XSanam XS 7)[ll]da-
hyunam paruv zana[12]nam XS ahyaya b-8)umi[13]ya vazarkaya
duraiy a[14]piy Darayava-9)haus XShy[15]a puS'a Haxamanisiya
3. 6[lG]atiy X-10)sayarsa XS vazar[17]ka vasna Aurahya maz-
daha [18]i-ll)ma hadis Darayavaus Xb [iOjaliunaus hya mana
1 visadaliyu-13)m, ao, ad.
" naiba-14)m, ac, ad.
2 kar-16)tam, ac, ad.
^au-17)ramazdahri, ac, ad.
*xs-i8)ayaSiya, ac.
^ utamaiy 19)xsa()"'am, ac. utama-19)iy, ad.
' tyamaiy 20)pifl"'a, ac. tyama-20)iy, ad.
8 Square brackets [ ] inclose thfe line-numbers of Xerx. Pers. cb, db, eb,
and Art. Pers. b.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 41
Xerx. Pers. ca, cb.
Repeated"'' on huge door-jamb and"* heside the south stairs of
tacara of Darius; Persiam,, Elamite, Babylonian.
1. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who created this earth, who
created yonder heaven, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made Xerxes king, one king of many, one lord of
many.
2. I (am) Xerxes the great king, king of kings, king of the
countries possessing many kinds of people, king of this great
earth far and wide, son of Darius the king, the Achaemenide.
3. Says Xerxes the great king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda
this dwelling Darius the king made who (was) my father; let
Ahura Mazda protect me with the gods, and what (was) done by
me and what (was) done by my father Darius the king, (all) this
let Ahura Mazda protect with the gods.
Xerx. Pers. da, db.
Iiex>eated^"' on two slabs and^* on tvall beside the steps in the
palace of Xerxes; Persian, Elamlte, Babylonian.
1. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who created this earth, who
created yonder heaven, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made Xerxes king, one king of many, one lord
of many.
2. I (am) Xerxes the great king, king of kings, king of the
countries possessing many kinds of people, king of this great
earth far and wide, son of Darius the king, the Achaemenide.
3. Says Xerxes the great king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda
this dwelling I made; let Ahura Mazda protect me with the
gods, and my kingdom and what (was) done by me.
Xerx. Pers. ea, eb.
Above the sculpture of the king, repeated on door-posts "" on north
and"* on east; Persian, Elamite, Babylonian.
Xerxes the great king, king of kings, the son of Darius the
king, the Achaemenide.
43 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
12)pit[20]a mam Auramazda patu[21]v hada baga-13)ibis uta
t[22]yamaiy kartam uta tyamai[23]y 14r)pi^''a Darayavahaus
XShy[24]a kartam avasciy 15) Auramaz[25]da patuv hada bagaibis
Xcrx. Pers. da, db.^
1. l)[l]Baga vazarka Auramazda [2]hya i-2)mam bumim
[3]ada hya avam 3)asma[4]nam ada hya martiya-i)[5]m ada hya
siyati[6]m ada mar-5)tiyahya [7]hya Xsayarsam x-6)sa[8]ya^iyam
akunaus ai[9]vam par-7)unam xsaya^[10]iyam aivam paru-8)nam
[lljframataram
2. adam X[12]sayars-9)a xsaya^iya [13]vazarka xsaya^iya
10)xs[14]ayaWyanam xsaya^[15]iya dahy-ll)unam paruvza[16]na-
nam xsayaSiya 12)[17]ahiyaya bumiya va[18]zarkaya 13)duraiy
a[19]piy Darayavahaus xs-14)[20]aya5iyahya pu^''a Hax[21]a-
mani[s]iya
3. 15)6atiy X[22]sayarsa xsaya^iya [23]va-16)zarka vasna
Auramaz[24:]daha ima had-17)is adam [25]akunavam mam Au-
ramaz-18)[26]da patuv hada bagai[27]bis utama-19)iy xsa^"'am
[2 8] uta tyamaiy kartam
Xerx. Pers. ea, eb.^
l)[l]Xsayarsa xsaya^iya vazar-2)[2]ka xsaya^iya xsayaSiya-
3)[3]nam Darayavahaus xsaya0-4:)iya[4]hya pu^'a Plaxamanisiya
Art. Pers. a [aa, ac, ad], b.^
1. 1)[1] Baga vazarka Auramazd[2]a hya 2)imam bumam [3]a-
da hya a-3)vam^ asman[J:]rim ada hya marti-4:)yam [5]ada hya
sayatam^ a[6]da mart-5)ihya^ hya ma[7]m Artaxsa0"'a xsaya-6)ft-
[8]ya^ akunaus aivam p'^'^uv''[9]n^am''* 7)xlaya^iyam aiva[10]m
p°T'^uv''n''am"^ 8)framataram'
2. [llj^iitiy Artaxsa^''a 9)xs[12]aya6iya^ vazarka xsaya[18]0iya
10)xsaya6iyanam [14]xsaya^iya ll)DAHyunam [15]xsaya5iya
1 Square brackets [ ] inclose the liae-nnmbers of Xerx. Pers. cb, db, eb,
and Art. Pers. b.
2 hya 3)avam, ac.
^saytam (for syatiim), Marquart, Foy.
■'thus "written for martiyahyii. -5)ya, ac.
*xsaya9i-6)ya, ac.
"thus written for pariiniim. See voc.
' written thus for f ramataram.
8x-9)sayafliya, ac.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 43
Art. Pers. a [aa, ac, ad], b.
Repeated on three slabs at north of palace of Artdxerxes and
ieside the western steps of tacara of Darius.
1. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who created this earth, who
created yonder heaven, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made me, Artaxerxes, king, one king of many,
one lord of many.
2. Says Artaxerxes the great king, king of kings, king of
countries, king of this earth: I (am) the son of Artaxerxes, the
king; Artaxerxes (was) the son of Darius the king; Darius (was)
the son of Artaxerxes the king; Artaxerxes (was) the son of
Xerxes the king; Xerxes (was) the son of Darius the king;
Darius was the son of Hystaspes by name; Hystaspes was the
son of Arsames by name, the Achaemenide.
3. Says Artaxerxes the king: This stone staircase (was) made
by me.
4. Says Artaxerxes the king; Let Ahura Mazda and the god
Mithra protect me and this country and what (was) done by me.
\m
INSCRIPTIONS OF NAKS-I-RUSTAM
On one of four similar Achaemenidan tomis at Nalts-i-Busta
near Persepolis, cruciform with the entrance in the tetrastyle
transverse section; above is a double row of figures supporting
platform where Darius stands before a burning cdtar; higlwr
up is the divine symbol; Persian, Elamlte, Babylonian.
Dar. NRa.
1 . A great god is Ahura Mazda who created this earth, who
created yonder heaven, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made Darius king, one king of many, one lord of
many.
2. I (am) Darius the great king, king of kings, king of the
countries possessing all kinds of people, king of this great earth
far and wide, son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide, a Persian, the
son of a Persian, an Aryan, of Aryan lineage.
44 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
ahyaya [16]BUMIya ada-12)m Artaxsa^'a x[17]saya-13)^iya^
pu^'a Artaxsa^"'a [18]Darayavau-l-i)s xiaya^iya [19]pu6''a Dara-
yavaus A-15)rtaxsa[20]^''a^ xsaya^iya pu^'a Arta[31]xsa-16)6''a^
Xsayarsa xsaya[22]^iya pu^'a X-l7)sayarsa Dara[23]yavaus xsa-
ya^-18)iya pu^'a [2i]Darayavaus V'staspa-19)hy[25]a nama pu^^'a
V*staspahy[26]a 20) Arsama nama pa^'a Ha[27]xamani«i-2] )ya
3. 6atiy A[28]rtaxsa6'a xsaya6i-22)ya [29]imain* ustasanam
afe°ga[30]nam^ ma-23)m upa° mam [31]karta
4. Oatij Arta-24)xla^''[32]a^ xlaya^iya mam Aura[33]mazda*
25)uta M'^ra baga pa[34]tuv uta ima-26)m'' DAHyum [35]uta
tya mam karta
INSCRIPTION'S OF NAKS-I-RUSTAjM
Dar. NRa.
1. l)Baga vazarka Auramazda hya im-2)am bumim ada
hya ayam asm-3)anam ada hya martiyam ada h-4)ya iiyatim ada
martiyahya 5)hya Darayavaum xsfiya^iyam ak-6)unaus aivam
p"r^uv''n''am* ^° xsaya6-7)iyam aivam p''r''nv''n''am'' ■"' framata-
8)ram"
2. adam Dai-ayavaus xsaya^iya va-9)zarka xsaya^iya xsaya^i-
yanam 10)xsayaffiya dahyunam vispazanri-ll)nam xsayaSiya
ahyaya bumi-12)ya vazarkaya duraiapiy^^ ViSt[a]s-13)pahya pu6''a
Haxamanisiya Parsa [P]-14)arsahya pu^'a Ariya Ariya c[i]-15)5"'a
3. tetiy Darayavaus xsa[ya]-16)^iya vasna Auramazdaha im[a]
17)dahyava tya ada[m] agarbaya[m] 18)apataram haca Parsa
adamsam 19)patiyaxsayaiy^' mana bajim aba[ra°] 20)tyasam'* ha-
cama a^ah[ya ava a]-21)kunava" datam tya mana ava[d]is 22)ada-
' xsa-13)yaSiya, ac.
2 arta-15)xsafl'a, ac.
^ artaxsaS'a 16)xsayarsa, ac.
^23)imam, ad.
^ thus written for aea"gamam.
"mam 23)upa, ad.
' artax-24)sa*'a, ad.
5auramazd-25)a, ad.
^i-26)mam, ad.
'"thus written for parunam. See too.
1' thus written for f ramataram.
'^dCiraiapiy, Stolze's Phot,
'■"patiyaxsayaijf, Stolze's Phot. See voc.
"h(?) tyasam, Stolze's Phot., showing a careless stroke of stone-cutter.
PERSIAX TEXTS TRANSLATED 45
3. Says Darius the king: By the.grace of Ahura Mazda these
(are) the provinces which I seized afar from Persia; I ruled
them; they brought tribute to me; what was commanded to
them by me, [this] they did; the law which (is) mine, that was
established for them; Media, Susiana, Parthia, Aria, Bactria,
Sogdiana, Chorasmia, Drangiana, Arachosia, Sattagydia, Ga(n)-
dara, India, the Amyrgian Scythians, the pointed-capped Scy-
thians, Babylon, Assyria, Arabia, Egypt, [Armenia], Cappa-
docia, Sparda, Ionia, the Scythians beyond the sea, Skudra,
the sea-faring (?)i lonians, the Pu(n)tians, Kushians, Maxyes,
Karkians.
4. Says Darius the king: Ahura Mazda, when he saw this
earth in commotion, afterwards gave it to me; he made me king;
I am king; by the grace of Ahura Mazda I established it on (its)
foundation; what I commanded to them, this they did as was
my will. If thou shalt think: "something limited in number
are these countries which Darius the king held," look at the
picture (of those) who are bearing my throne, thus thou wilt
know them; then it will be known to thee (that) the spear of a
Persian man hath gone forth afar; then it will be known to thee
(that) a Persian man fought his foe far from Persia.
5. Says Darius the king: This (is) what (was) done; all this by
the grace of Ahura Mazda I did; Ahura Mazda bore me aid
while I was doing my deeds; let Ahura Mazda protect me from
evil and my royal house and this country; this I pray of Ahura
Mazda; this let Ahura Mazda give me.
6. O man, what (is) the precept^ of Ahura Mazda, may it not
seem to thee repugnant; do not leave the true' path; do not sin.
Dar. NRb.
I. A gi'eat god is Ahura Mazda who + + + + + ++ created
welfare for man + + + made + + + + + + + + + + Darius the
king + + + + + + + + + + +
1 See voc. s. v. takabara.
^Cf. Turf an MSS., Qatriy6ndn vA 'istratiy6tan 'aj Pllatis framdn 'oh
padgrlft, as for the centurions and soldiers a command was received for
them from Pilate.
^Cf. Turf an MSS., rdst, true; rSstdft bagpfthar 'ast, the son of God is
truth, M. 18.
46 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
riy^ Mada Uvaja Parfeva [Harai]-23)va Baxtris Suguda Uvara-
[zm]-24)is Zra'^ka^ Harauvatis ®atagu[s Ga"]-25)dara Hindus Saka
Haumavar[ka^ Sa]-26)ka Tigraxauda Babir[us A]-27)^ura Ara-
baya Mudraya [Armina] 28)Katpatuka Sparda Yauna Saka tyai[y
ta]-29)radraya Skudra Yauna Takabara Pu"[tiy]-30)a* Kusiya
Maciya Karka
4. tetiy D-31)arayavaus xsaya^iya Auramaz[da ya6]-32)a avaina
imam bumim yau + + + +* 33)pasavadim mana frabara ma[m
xsa]-34:)ya^iyam akunaus adam XH;l[ya^]iya 35)amiy vasna Au-
ramazdah[a] a-36)damsim gafeva niyasadayam [tya]sa-37)m adam
afeham aya akunava" ^ [ya^a] mam 38)kama aha yadipatiy^ man-
iya[ha]-39)y^ ciyakaram' a[va^** dahy]a[va] 40)tya Daraya[va]us
[x]saya[6]iya 41)adaraya patikaram didiy [tya]i[y mana] g-42)a^-
um bara^tiy [avadja^^ xlnas[ah(i)dis] 43)adataiy azda bava[t]iy
Par[sa]h[ya] 4:4r)martiyahya duraiy^^ ar[sti]s pa-45)ragmata ada-
taiy azda ba[v]ati-46)y Parsa martiya durayapiy^' [hac]a Pa-4:7)rsa
hamaram patiyajata
5. ^a[t]iy Da-48)rayavaus xsayafiiya aita t[ya] karta-49)m ava
visam vasna Auramazdaha ak-50)unavam Auramazdamaiy up-
a[s]tam aba-51)ra yata kartam akuna[vam ma]m A-62)iiramazda
patuv haca s''r\^* utama-53)iy vifem uta imam dahyaum aita
ada-54)m Auramazdam jadiyamiy aitama-55)iy Am-amazda
dadatuT
6. 66)martiya hya Auramazdah-57)a framana hauvtaiy gas-
58)ta ma fedaya paftm 59)tyam rastam ma 60)avarada ma
starava^^
^ adaraya, Toy.
'■^ zara^ka, ed.
8 haumavarfka], see voo.
*pu[tiy]a, ed.
^yau[da''tim], Bai-tholomae. yu[diya], WB'. yauf^ + +, WB". See voc.
^akunava", Bartholomae. akunava'ta, ed.
'yadipatiy, Stolze's Phot. yadipad[i]y, ed. wrongly.
8maniya[ha]y, Stolze's Phot. mani[yiihy t]ya, ed._
" ciyaikaram, ed. See voo.
i''a[va], ed.
" [avad]a, Stolze's Phot,
'^duraiy, Stolze's Phot,
i^durayapiy, Stolze's Phot.
"sara, Jn. sarana, Jiisti. gasta, Foy. See voc.
'^starava, Bartholomae, WB". stakava, WBi. See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 47
2. Says Darius the king: By the grace of Ahura Mazda + +
4. + done by me + + + ++++ + ++ + ++ + + + + + + + +
Dar. NRc.
Gobryas, a Patischorian, spear-bearer of Darius the king.
Dar. NRd.
Aspathines, bow-bearer (?),^ a server of the arrows (?)^ of
Darius the king.
Dar. NRe.
These (are) the Maxyes.
INSCRIPTIONS OF SUSA
Dar. Sus. a.
On tablet now in Louvre.
[I am Darius the great king, king of kings, king of countries, J
son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide. Says Darius the king + +
+ + + + this I did + + + + I give due reverence ( ?).
Dar. Sus. b.
On tablet now in Louvre.
[I am Darius the great king, king of] kings, king of coun-
tries, king of this earth, son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide.
Art. Sus. a.
On four pedestals of Colvm.n LLall; Persian, Elamite,
Babylonian.
Says Artaxerxes the great king, king of kings, king of coun-
tries, king of this earth, the son of Darius the king: Darius
(was) the son of Artaxerxes the king; Artaxerxes (was) the
1 vaS'abara, see voc.
2 See voc. s. v. daraj^anta.
48 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
Dar. NRb.
1. l)Baga vazarka Auramazda hya ada + + + + + + + 2)+ + + +
+ tya + + + + + ada si-3)yatim martiyahya + + [ak]u[naus] +-4)+
aruvastam upariy [Daraya]Tau[m] xsa-5)ya(9iyam + + + + +
2. tetiy D[arayava]us x[sa-6)ya]6iya yasna Aui-amazd[aha] + 4.
+ + kar[tam] + + 7)[ma]iy tya + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + J. darsam + + + + + + + Au[ramazda] + + + + + + + darsam + + + +
Dar. NRc.
l)Gaubruva Patisuvaris Dara-2)yavahaus xsaya^iyahya arsti-
bara
Dar. WRd.
l)Aspacana vafi'abara^ Darayavahaus xs-2)aya^iyahya ilu-
vam^ daraya°ta^
Dar. NRe.
lyam* Maciya
INSCRIPTIONS OF SUSA
Dar. Sus. a.
l)[Adam Darayavaus XS vazarka XS Xbya]na[in 2)X§ dah-
yunam Visjtaspahya puS'a Ha-3)[xamanisiya ^a]tiy Darayavaus
XS 4:)+ + + + + + + ++ + + + + + + + ava akunavam tya 6)+ + + +
+ + + + + + + + naj
\ya fraSam y(?)adayainaiy^
Dar. Sus. b.
l)[Adam Darayava-2)us xsaya^iya 3)vazarka xs]a[ya-4)6iya xs]-
ayaft-5)[yanam] xiaya-6)[^ya] dahyuna-7)[m xsa]ya6iya 8)[ahya]-
yay^ 9)[bumiy]a V'[st]a-10)[spahy]a pu(9'a ll)[Haxama]nisiya
Art. Sus. a.
l)®atiy Artaxsa^'a XS vazarka X§ XSyanam XS DAHyunam
XS ahyaya BUMIya Darayavausahya' XShya pu6''a D-2)araya-
vausahya Artaxsa^'^ahya XShya pu^'a Artaxsa5''aliya Xsayarca-
1 va^^'abara, Justi.
^isuvam, Bartholomae. isunam, WB.
^darayata, Foy. dasyama, Justi.
4iijiaya =. imaiy, Bartholomae.
^dudnjamsiij, Weissbach. y(?)adayamaiy, Tolman.
^[ahyajyily [bumiy]a, Foy; stone-cutter's blunder for ahyaya-
' darayavaus-hya, artaxsaS^a-hya, etc., Marquart.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 49
son of Xerxes the king; Xerxes (was) the son of Darius the
king; Darius was the son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide; this
apadana Darius, my ancestor made; [later under Artaxerxes my
grandfather it was burned; By the grace of Ahura Mazda, An^-
hita and Mithra I built this apadftna; may Ahura Mazda, Ana-
hita and Mithra protect me].^
Art. Sus. b.
On pedestal of column^ noiv in Louvre.
I (am) Artaxerxes, the great king, king of kings,^ the king,
the son of Darius the king.
Art. Sus. c.
On stone fragment, now in Louvre.
+ + + + the Achaemenide. Says Artaxerxes the great king,
king of kings, king of countries, king of this earth: this dwell-
ing and this + + + + stone window-cornice? + + + +
INSCEIPTIONS OF SUEZ
Memorial of cmnfletion of canal from, Nile to Red Sea; on stele
found near ShalUf et-Terrtlleh at the 133d liilometer of Suez
Camd.
Sz. a.
Between two standing figures.
Darius.
Sz. b.
rerslan at right of thefigtires; at left Elamite and Babylonian.
Darius the great king, [king of kings, king of countries, king
of] this great [earth], the son [of Hystaspes], the Achaemenide.
1 Supplied from Elam. version; of. Foy, Die Neuelamische Inschrift,
Art. Sus. a, WZKM, 19, 277 ff.
2 In 1895 I copied the original and my notes show XSyana for XSyanam
4
50 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
hya XShya pu^'a Xsayarcahya Dara-3)yavausahya Xbhya pu^'a
Darayavausahya Vistaspahya pu^'a Haxaman[i]siya^ imam apa-
dana Darayavaus apanyakama ak-4)uDas ab(i)ypara [u]pa Arta-
[xsa6i''am nyalkam^ + + + + [An(a)]h(i)ta[hya u]ta [M']era[hya]
+ + + + da + + + m + a + + + AURAMAZDA A-5)n(a)h(i)ta ut[a
M'l^ra + + + + + + + +
Art. Sus. b.
Adam Artaxsa^'a XS vazarka XS xSyana X§ Darayavaus
XShya pu^'a
Art. Sus. c.
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ++ + + +
l)[Hax]amanisi[ya ^atiy Artaxsa^^'a] 2)xsaya6iya va[zarka xsa-
ya^iya x]-3)5aya6iyanam xsaya[^iya dahyun]-4:)am xsaya^iya
ahyaya [bumiya i]-5)mam hadis uta imam + + + + 6)canam' t}''a
afe^gainam taj. + + 4. 7)+ + + + + + + Au[ramazda] + + + +
INSCRIPTIONS OF SUEZ
Sz. a.
D[a]ra[ya]vau[s]
Sz. b.
l)[Dara]yavaus XS vazarka 2)[XS XSyanam XS dahy-3)unam
XS ahyajya 4)[bumiya vazarkajya 5)[Vistaspahya] pu-6)[6''a]
Haxa[manisi]ya
Sz. c.
1. l)[Baga] vazarka Auramazda hya avam asmanam ada hya
imam bu-2)mim* ada hya [mar]tiyam ad[a] h[ya s]iyatim ada mar-
tiyahy-3)a hya Darayavaum XSyam akunaus* hya D[a]rayava-
haus XSyahya xla^''a-4)m frabara tya vazarkam tya [uvaspam
u]mar[ti]yam
2. adam Darayavaus 5)XS vazarka XS XSyanam XS dahyu-
nam v[ispazan]anam'' [XS] ahyay-6)a^ bumiya vazarkaya duraiy
apiy Vistas[pahya* p]u6''a Ha-7)xamaiiisiya
1 thus written for haxamanisij'a.
^abyapara [u]pa arta[xsaf?'am nya]kani [+ + ^. vasna AURAMADAlia
Aii(a)]h(i)ta[hya u]ta [M(i)]6ra[hya imam apa]da[na ada]m a[kuna] At'-
KAMAZDA An(a)h(i)ta ut[a] M(i)Sra [mam patuv haca gasta uta imam tya
akuna], Foy. I would ratlier supply [Yaya]m a[kuiaauma?] [utamaiy
xsaS'am].
* [usta]canam = ustasanam, Foy.
*so Daressy, Envision des Textes de la Stfile de Clialouf.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 51
Sz. c.
The Persian with Elamite and Bahylonian {latter obliterated)
covers the remaining space; on otJter side hieroglyphics, not
hearing liowevei\ on Persian text.
1. A great [god is] Ahura Mazda who created yonder heaven,
who created this earth, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made Darius king, who gave the kingdom to Da-
rius, which (is) great, which possesses good horses (and) good
men.
2. I (am) Darius the great king, king of kings, king of coun-
tries possessing all people, [king] of this gi-eat earth far and
wide, son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide.
3. Says Darius the king: lam a Persian; from Persia I seized
Egypt; I commanded to dig this canal from the Nile by name a
river which flows in Egypt, to the sea which goes from Persia;
afterwards this canal [was dug] thus as T commanded, and [ships]
passed^ from Egypt by this canal to Persia as was my [will].
INSCRIPTION OF KERMAN
Dar. Kr.
On three sides of small tetragonal pyramid; Persian, JElamite,
Babylonian.
I am Darius, the great king, king of kings, king of countries,
king of this earth, son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide.
INSCRIPTIONS OF ELVEND
Dar. Elv.
On steep rode in niche to left; Persian, Elamite, Bahylonian.
I. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who created this earth, who
created yonder heaven, who created man, who created welfare
for man, who made Darius king, one king of many, one lord of
many.
1 aya°ta; for transfer to them, conjugation cf. New Pars. ayaiJ < a +
*ayatiy. Cf. Horn. NS, 19, 3.
52 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
3. ftitiy Dara[ya]vaus X§ ada[m PJarsa ami[yhac]a Pa-8)[rs]a
Mudrayam agarbayam^ adam iii[yas]tayam imam [yuYiya]-9)m^
ka^tanaiy haca^ Pirava nama rauta tya Mudrayaiy danu[vatiy^
ab]-10)iy draya' tya haca Parsa aitiy pa[sava]* iyam yuviya
[akaniy]^ ll)ava[^a yajfe^ adam niyastayam ut[a] + + j. + +' aya^ta^
haca [Mudra]-12)ya ta + + + m* yuviyam [a]biy^ Par[sa]m [ava^]a
ya^a ma[m kama aha]'
IXSCRIPTION OF KEEMAN
l)Adam Darayavaus x-2)sayaftya vazarka x-3)saya6iya xstiya-
6-4)iyanam xsiiya^-5)iya dahyunam xs-6)aya^iya ahyaya 7)bumi-
ya Vista-8)spahya pu^'a Haxa-9)manisiya
INSCRIPTIONS OF ELVEND
Dar. Elv.
1. l)Baga vazarka Am-amazda 2)hya imam bumim 3)ada hya
avam asma-4)Dam ada hya martiya-5)m adfi hj'a siyiiti-6)m ada
martiyahya 7)hya Darayavaum xsaya-8)^iyam akunaus aiva-9)m
parunam xsaya^-10)iyam aivam parunam ll)framataram
2. adam 12)Darayavaus xsriya5i-13)ya vazarka xsfiya^iya
14:)xsaya^iyanam xi-15)aya^iya dahyunam pa-16)ruzananam xsa-
ya^-l7)iya ahyaya bumiy-lS);! vazarkaya duraiy 19)apiy Vistas-
pahy-20)a pnO'^a Haxamanisiya
Xerx. Elv.
I. l)Baga vazarka Auramazda 2)hya ma^ilta bagauam 3)hya
imam bumim ad-4)a hya avam asmanam 5)ada hya martiyam
ad-6)a hya iiyatim ada 7)martiyahya hya Xsa-8)yarsam xsfiya^i-
yam 9)akuiiaus aivam parun-10)!im xsaya^iyam aivam ll)paru-
nam framataram
ifio Daressy, Kevision des Textes de la Stele de Chalouf.
2danu[taiy], of. Bartholomae, Altiraa. Wb. 683.
3 daraya, ed. wrongly.
•• aitiy pastiva, Bartholomae. aitiy iyam yiiviyti, ed.
'The supplement akaniy seems quite certain; cf. Daressy.
^avaSd, yaSa, Bartholomae. ava + +, Daressy. pasuva, ed.
'naviya, WB"., a very doubtful supplement and hardly justified from
the use of the word in Bh. I, 18; I would rather read *nava, shi2}s; cf. Skt.
nilvas.
'ta[ra ima]m, WB".
"ma[mkfima aha], WB".
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 53
2. I (am) Darius the great king, king of kings, king of coun-
tries possessing many kinds of people, king of this great earth
far and wide, the son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide.
Xerx. Elv.
On same roch in n iche to right; Persian, Elariiite, Babylonian.
1. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who (is) greatest of the
gods, who created this earth, who created yonder heaven, who
created man, who created welfare for man, who made Xerxes
king, one king of many, one lord of many.
2. I (am) Xerxes the great king, king of kings, king of coun-
tries possessing many kinds of people, king of this great earth
far and wide, the son of Darius the Icing, the Achaemenide.
INSCRIPTION OF VAN :
Xerx. Van
On niche hi perpendicular roch of citadel; Persian, Elamite, '
Babylonian.
1. A great god (is) Ahura Mazda who (is) the greatest of the
gods, who created this earth, who created yonder heaven, who
created man, who created welfare for man, who made Xerxes
king, one king of many, one lord of many.
2. I (am) Xerxes the great king, king of kings, king of
countries possessing many kinds of people, king of this great
earth far and wide, the son of Darius the king, the Achaemenide.
3. Says Xerxes the king: Darius the king, who (was) my
father, he by the grace of Ahura Mazda did much which (was)
beautiful and he commanded to dig out this place where he did
not make an inscription written; afterwards I commanded to
write this inscription; [let Ahura Mazda] protect [me with the
gods, and my kingdom and what (has been) done by me].
51: PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
2. 12)adam Xsayarsa xsa-13)ya^iya vazarka xsaya^i-14)ya
xsayaSiyanfim xs-15)aya6iya dahyunam par-16)uzaiianam xsaya-
Wya 17)ahiyaya bumiya va-18)zarkaya duraiy apiy 19)Darayava-
haus xsaya^iya-20)hya pu6''a Haxamanisiya
INSCRIPTION OF VAN
1. l)Baga vazarka Auramazda hya ma^i-2)sta baganam hya
imam bum-3)im ada hya avam asmanam 4:)ada hya martiyam ada
hya 5)siyatim ada martiyahya 6)hya Xsayarsam xsaya^iyam
7)akunaus ah'am parunam x-8)saya^iyam aivam parunam 9)fra-
mataram
2. adam Xsayarsa 10)xsaya^iya vazarka xlaya^iya ll)xsayaffi-
yanam xsaya^iya da-12)hyuiiam paruv zananam xs-13)aya^iya
ahyaya bumiya va-lizarkaya duraiy apiy Daraya-15)vahaus xsa-
ya^iyahya pu^^'a Ha-16)xamanisiya
3. ^atiy Xsayarsa 17)xsaya5iya Darayavaus xlaya-18)6iya hya
mana pita hauv va-19)sna Auramazdaha vasiy tya 20)naibam
akunaus uta ima st-21)anam hauv niyastaya ka^tanaiy 22)yanaiy^
dipim naiy nipist-23)am akunaus pasava adam Di-24:)yastayam
imam dipim nip-25)istanaiy [mam Auramazda p]a-26)tu[v hada
bagaibis utamai-27)y xsa^'^am uta tyamaiy kartam]
INSCRIPTION OF HAMAD AN
Art. Ham.
l)®atiy ArtaxsaS''a XS vazarlva XS [XSyanam XS DAHyunam
XS ah]-2)yaya BUMIya Diirayavasahya^ XShya [pu6''a Daraya-
vasahya Artaxsa6ra]-3)hya XShya pu5'"a Artaxsa^rahya^ X[sa-
yarsahya XShya pu^'a Xsayar]-4)sahya Darayavasahya XShya
pu[^"'a Darayavasahya Vistaspahya pu6'a] 5)B[axamanisiya imam
apadana vasn[a AURAMAZDAha An(a)h(i)tahya uta M'trahya
akuna m]-6)am* AURAMAZDA An(a)h(i)ta uta MHra ma[m
utamaiy xsa^'^am^ ut]-7)a imam tya akuna ma^ + + + + +
' yana naiy, Bollensen.
2 darayava[u]sahya, Tolman.
^artaxsaS'ahya, Bartholomae, but the copy I made of the original shows
traces of 6v.
^[akun]am, Foy.
^ [utdmaiy xsa^fam], Tolman. [haoa gastii], WB.
^akunaumu(?) Tolman. akunavam, Bartholomae. See voc.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 55
INSCRIPTION OF HAMAD AN
Art. Ham.
O/i, inoldings of pedestals^ now in British Museum; Persian^
Elamite, Babylonian.
Says Artaxerxes, the great king, king [of kings, king of
countries, king] of this earth, [son] of Darius the king: [Darius]
was the son of Artaxerxes the king; Artaxerxes (was) [the son
of] Xerxes [the king] ; Xerxes (was) the son of Darius the king;
[Darius (was) the son of Hystaspes], the Achaemenide; this
apadana by the grace [of Ahura Mazda, Anahita and Mithra
we (?) made]; let Ahura Mazda, Anfthita and Mithra [protect]
me [and my kingdom] and this which we (?) have done.
INSCRIPTION OF MURGHAB
On monolith, above tvingedjigure clad in long garments, rejjeated
on other pillars; Persian, Elamite, Babylonian.
I (am) Cyrus the king, the Achaemenide.^
SEAL INSCRIPTIONS
Dar. Seal
On small cylinder in British Museum; the Icing in chariot
attaching lion; Persian, Elamite, Babylonian.
I (am) Darius the king.
Seal laser, a.
Arsaces by name, [the son] of Athiyabaushna.
iCf. Herzfeld's Pasargadae, Klio, 1908; Hoffmann-Kutschke, Philol.
Nov., Nov. 1907.
56 PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLITERATED
INSCRIPTION OF MURGHAB
l)Adam Kurus xsaya-2)5iya Haxamanisiya
SEAL INSCRIPTIONS
Dar. Seal
Adam Darayavaus XS
Seal Inscr. a.
l)Arsa-2)ka n-3)ama 4)A6i-6)yaba-6)usna-7)hyai 8)[pu6'a]
Seal Inscr. b.
l)IIadaxaya^ 2)+ + + + 4. + 4.4. + + 3)6ada0a ^ ^.
Seal Inscr. c.
Vasdasaka^
Seal Inscr. d.
Vahyav'sdapaya*
Seal Inscr. e.
l)m" Xa-2)rsa-3)dasyas
WEIGHT INSCRIPTION
1)11 karsa 2)adain Dara-3)yavaus xs-4:)ayaWya va-5)zarka Vii-
6)taspahya 7)pu^''a Hax-8)amanisiya
VASE INSCRIPTIONS
Xerx. Vases
Xsayarsa XS vazarka
Art. Vases
Artaxsa^'a XS vazarka
The Venice Vase reads ardaxcasca, see voc. ; the Berlin Vase
has simply xsayaSiya after the name of the king.
1 aMytibausnahya, Bartholomae.
shadaxya, WB.
'vasda saka, WB.
«vahyav[i]sda paya, WB.
" xisyfirsfi, Justi.
PERSIAN TEXTS TRANSLATED 57
Seal Inscr. b.
Hadakhaya (?).
Seal Inscr. c.
7ashdasaka (?).
Seal Inscr. d.
Vahyavishdapaya (?).
Seal Inscr. e.
Seal. Xerxes (?).
WEIGHT INSCRIPTION
Dar. Weight Inscr.
Green lasalt; British Museum; Persian, Elamite, Babylonian.
2 Karsha-weight. I (am) Darius, the great king, the son of
Hystaspes, the Achaemenide.
VASE INSCEIPTIONS
Xerx. Vases
On several alabaster specimens {London, Paris, PhiladelpMa) ;
Persian, Elamite, Babylonian, and Hieroglyphics .
Xerxes the great king.
Art. Vases
Now in Philadelphia, Berlin, Venice; the Venice Vase is of por-
phyry; Persian, Elam.ite, Babyloniam,, and Hieroglyphics.
Artaxerxes the great king.
FRAGMENTS OF VASES FOUND AT SUSA
(trilingual)
fr
R
'^^^ rrnVin:
J. de Morgan, D6l6gation en Perse, Vol. 1, p. 130.
xsayars[a], Xerxes
artax[sa6'^a], Artaxerxes
[xs]aya0[iya], Tiing
(58)
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
A, A
a, 1) Verbal prefix, to, unto; e. g. aya^ta = a + aya"ta (them,
to i), Dar. Sz. c. 3; cf. New Pers. ayaS < a + *ayatiy. Note Turf an
MSS. a-gad (better than agad, MtlUer). 2)Postpos. prep, with
loo. , m, on, by ; e. g. , ga^ava, in place, dastaya, at Jiand, arbairaya,
in Arbela, drayahya, hy the sea. Cf. Jackson, Av. Gram. 736;
Schulze, KZ, 29, 264; Brugmann, Grundr^., 619; Bartholomae,
Grundr. d. iran. Philol. , 217-9. In Av. also with ace. , abl. , gen. ,
dat. ; e. g. Av. xVfaSa, Skt. svapnad a; Av. ahurai a, Skt. asuraya.
Av. a, Skt. a.
a- (before consonants; an- before vowels), neg. prefix; a-xsata,
inviolate, unhurt, a-namaka, {month) of the nameless (god), an-ahita,
without hlemish. I. E. *n-, *nn-, Av. a-, an- (Middle Pers. a-, an-),
Skt. a-, an-, Gr. a-, av-, Lat. in- (for en-), Goth. un-; Gr. va-, vq- (I.
E. *n); cf. Schulze, KZ, 27, 606.
a, demon, pron. this. Gen. sg. f. ahyaya (written [ahyajyay
by stone-cutter's blund'er in Dar. Sus. b.), ahiyaya. Loc. sg. f.
ahyaya, ahiyaya. In both gen. and loc. the stem a has been in-
creased by hy (from gen. sg. ?), to which is added an ending
analogous to that of nouns. Cf. Bartholomae, Grundr. 289, 2;
Foy, KZ, 35, 9. I. E. *o-, Av. a, Skt. a, Gr. e-l, Cret. i
aita, demon, pron. this. Ace. sg. n. aita. I. E. *eito, YAv.
aeU (Turfan MSS. 'ed), Skt. eta.
aina[ira] (Elam. ainaira; Bab. a-ni-ri-'), m. name of a Babylonian,
father of Nidintu-B6l. The word is clear in Elam. and Bab.
texts. KT record space for about two characters. Gen. sg.
aina[ira]hya, Bh. 1. 16.
aiva, num. one. Ace. sg. m. aivam. I. E. oiuo, Av. aeva (Mid-
dle Pers. ev. New Pers. yak < *aivaka, cf. Horn, NS, 19, 4.),
Gr. oios, Cypr. olpoi.
(59)
GO ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
autiyara (Elam. autiyarus; Bab. u-ti-ia-a-ri), m. name of a district
in Armenia. Nom. sg. autiyara.
aura, m. god. Instr. sg. aura, Dar. Pers. e, 3. siyatis axsata
hauvciy aura nirasatiy; cf . Foy, KZ, 37, 661. Gen. Sg. (with mazdali),
aurahya mazdaha; cf. Jackson, Zoroaster, 171; Tolman, PAPA, 33,
68. Av. ahura, Skt. asura.
auramazdah (Elam. uramasta; Bab. u-ra-ma-az-da), m. name of the
supreme god, Ahura Mazda. Nom. sg. auramazda. Ace. sg.
auramazdam. In the mutilated passage, Bh. 4. 1. 44, auramazd" + +
+ + + rtaiyiya, KT plainly record d°, thus making impossible the
supplement auramazdiya of WB, which otherwise might receive
some support from the Elam. anMrir ""uramasta-ra, I state as a fol-
lower of Ahura Mazda. I have proposed the supplement aura-
mazd[am upava]rtaiy (Vdt. Stud. 1, 31), regarding + + + + rtaiyiya
as dittography for + + + + rtaiy (cf. tyana mana, Bh. 1, 8), and
translating, / turn unto Ahura Mazda (i. e. / appeal to him).
For this meaning of upa + a + vart in Skt., cf. MBh. 5, 1679
and examples quoted in PWb. KT give space for four or five
characters in the lacuna. See other proposed supplements s. v.
+ + + + rtaiyiya. For former discussions of the passage cf. Foy,
KZ, 37, 539, (ibid. 35, 44), ZDMG, 52, 565; Gray, JAOS, 23, 61;
Fr. Miiller, WZKM, 1, 59. Gen. sg. auramazdaha (frequently
written auramazdaha in Dar. Pers. d, e, NR; Xerx. Pers. a),
aura (q. V.) + mazdah, the lord l:nov}ing all., Av. mazdah, name of
supreme god (with and without ahura), Ar. *ma(n)8dha-; cf. Bar-
tholomae, BB, 13, 80. Phi. ohrmazd, New Pers. hormizd; cf . Horn,
NS, 37, 21.
axsata, adj. imhurt., inviolate., undisturhed. Nom. sg. f. axsa-
ta, Dar. Pers. e, 3. hya duvais[ta]m siyiitis axsata, prosperity for a
long time undlsturled. Thumb (Tolman, O. P. Inscr. 148, n)
regarded the preceding hya as 3 sg. opt. of ah. For Bartholo-
mae's view see s. v. hya. a(neg.) + xsata, ppl. of xsan, Skt. ksan,
Gr. KTEtVo); cf. Kretschmer, KZ, 31, 428.
agar[tar], m. supplement which I proposed (Vdt. Stud. 1, 9)
for ag^r" _^ +, KT, who record space for two characters. I take
the word as nom. ag. of a + *gar, to wake (YAv. gar, Skt- gr), a
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 61
watcher, wakeful, zealoun. This meaning fits the Bab. pi-it-ku-du,
watchful. Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 725) makes the same conjec-
ture; "Ich vermute eine Ableitung von der Wurzel gar, wach
sein + a." He writes me under date of May 19, 1908; "Ich
freue mich dass wir hinsichtlich agara + +, 1. 21, und [biy]a, 4.
69, einer Ansicht sind." Bartholomae, WZKM, 22, 72, com-
pares Skt. gurta, Av. agramaitis, translating u}ill!g, 'wiUfdhrig,
folgsann. The emendation dausta of ed. is impossible, [akka
kannas], who was friendly, of Weissbach and KT can hardly be
the correct supplement for the corresponding Elam. Should
we, however, restore the verb kanne, its form would be kannes,
aor. 3 sg., not kanna§. Nom. sg. agar[ta]. Note Tm-fan MSS.
vigarftned.
a°tar, prep, with ace. %vithin, among, in. Bh. 4. 3. a"tar ima
hamarana. Bh. 2. 13. [a"ta]r dldam fraha^jam. Av. antara (Turfan
MSS. 'andar), Skt. antar.
atiy, verbal prefix, heyond, across, jiast. I. E. *eti, YAv. aiti
(Turfan MSS. 'ad, 'ed), Skt. ati.
afe"gaina or a^a"gaiaa, adj. of stone. Nom. sg. m. a^a"gaina,
Dar. Pers. C. ardastana afe"gaina. Acc. Sg. f . a^a"gainam, Art. Sus.
c; a^a^ganam for afe^gainam, Art. Pers. a, b, 3. YAv. asanga (New
Pers. sang, Horn, NS, 38, 2). Cf. KZ. 39, 69.
a^ahavaja, a doubtful word read by KT in Bh. 4. 1. 90. Hoff-
mann-Kutschke would connect with pepraka of Elam. Bh. L. 1. 8.
a^iy, thus to be read in place of a[b]iy of WB' in Bh. 1. 1. 91.
This old reading is confirmed by KT, who remark; "The read-
ing of the sign 6 is certain." afty babiru[m yafe naiy upjayam, xohen
I had not come to Bcdnfon.
a^iyabausna, m. name of the father of Arsaces. Gen. sg.
aftyabausnahya. *aftya, true (cf. hasiya, q. V.) -f *bausna, fr. buj, to
free, YAv. buj (Middle Pers. boxtan); cf. ZDMG, 51, 248. Bar-
tholomae reads al^jyabausna, but against his etymology cf. Justi,
IF, 17, Anz. 106, who gives the meaning of the compound,
■wahrhaftige Erlosung hahend.
(i2 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
SLdnra. (Elam. assura; Bab. as-sur; Gr. 'Ao-o-v/Di'a), f. Assyria.
Nom. sg. a^ura. Loc. sg. a^uraya; cf. Bartholomae, Grundr. 413.
aS'ma or a^'ina (Elam. assina; Bab. a-si-na), m. name of a Susian
rebel. Nom. sg. a^'ina. Ace. sg. a^'inam. The Persian name is
quite likely a transcription of the Elam. ; cf . Foy, KZ, 37, 498.
Justi, on the other hand, suggested a possible connection with
Av. star (New Pers. aSar), ^fi/v; cf. YAv. atara-data, fire-giveriy
Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 324.
a^'iyadiya (Elam. assiyatiyas; Bab. Mslimu, ninth month), n.
name of a Persian month, Nov. -Dec. Gen. sg. a^'iyadiyahya (sic
KT, not a^'iyadiyahya of the ed. ; cf . Bartholomae, Grundr. 412,
n. 1). *atar, ,/re, Av. atar (Turfan MSS. 'adur. New Pers. aSar)
+ *yadlya, W07'shij), fr. yad (q. v.).
ada, adv. then. GAv. ada, YAv. aSa, Skt. adha. a + da; cf..
Jackson, Av. Gr. 729; Whitney, Skt. Gr. 1103.
adakaiy, adv. then, ada + kaiy, loc. sg. to I. E. *ko, Gr. Trof;
cf. Thumb, KZ, 33, 22. Bartholomae (Grundr. 218, 3) reads
ada-kiy, instr. sg., Skt. kim in maHm, Lat. qui in atqui. Note Tur-
fan MSS. 'eg.
[[adjata, adj. noble. Nom. pi. m. [ad]ata, emendation (Andreas-
Htising) in Bh. 1. 7, for which Bab. [marj-banuti gave some sup-
port, is now impossible because of clear record of [a]mata in KT;
also Jackson's conjecture (JAOS, 24, 89) in Bh. 4. 1. 51 in place
of [y]ata of KT and [yat]a of ed. The old reading [y]ata aha", as
Jong as they lived., seems more in accord with Elam. and Bab.
versions. Jackson's view would, of course, connect the word
with YAv. azata (New Pers. azad).]
adam, pers. pron. I. Nom. sg. adam, Av. azam (Turfan ilSS.
'az), Skt. aham. Acc. Sg. mam, Av. mam, Skt. mam, Abl. Sg. ma,
GAv. mat, Skt. mat, Gen. Sg. mana, maiy, YAv. mana, me, GAv.
moi, Skt, mana, me. Nom. pi. vayam, Av. vaem, Skt. vayam. Gen.
pi. amaxam, YAv. ahmakam, Skt. asmakam.
adiy, prep, with loc. in. Bh. 4. 14. ufrastadly parsa. Cf . Bar-
tholomae, IF, 12, 110. Skt. adhi. Cf. Turfan MSS. 'adiy&var.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON (J3
adukanisa (thus read for adukani of ed. ; cf. KT, 35. Elam.
atukannas), f. name of a Persian month, Oct. -Nov., Oppert; June-
July, Foy; May-June, Justi. Gen. sg. aauka[ni]sahya, Bh. 3. 12.
kan, to d/'ff (q. v.), Grahen, Ausstechen der Bewasserungskanale,
Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 61.
ana, demon, pron. thU. Instr. sg. ana, Dar. Pers. e. hada ana
parsa kara. Av. ana, Skt. ana.
ana, prep, with instr. al^ong, throughout. Xerx. Pers. a. ana
parsa. YAv. ana, Gr. ava.
anamaka (Elam. anamakkas; Bab. tebetu, tenth month), adj.
name of a Persian month, Dec. -Jan. Gen. sg. anamakahya (Bar-
tholomae, Grundr. 412, n. 1). a -f namaka, Skt. anamaka; Monat
des namenlosen., d. i. des hOchsten Gottes, Bartholomae, Altiran.
Wb.; cf. Justi, ZDMG, 61, 248.
anahita, name of a goddess; written in text an^hH", Art. Sus.
a; Art. Ham. YAv. an-ahita, spotless; cf. Wilhelm, ZDMG, 40,
105; Foy, KZ, 35, 63; Tolman, PAPA, 33, 69.
aniya, adj. l)other, another. Nom. sg. m. aniya. Ace. sg. m.
aniyam. Nom. pi. m. aniya, aniyaha (thus read in Bh. 4. 1. 63 and
probably in 1. 61; "From the traces which exist the form aniyaha
is more probable than aniya" KT). Nom. pi. f. aniya. Loc. pi.
f. aniyauva. 2)the one — the other. Ace. sg. m. aniyam, Bh. 1.
18. aniyam usabarim akunavam, one part I put on camels. Gen. sg.
m. aniyahya, Bh. 1. 18. aniyahya asam franayam, J'or the other 1
hr ought horses. S)strange, hostile, an enemy. Nom. sg. m.
aniya, Bh. 1. 19. aniya apiya [ahyatja (Kern, [aharatja, Oppert, KT).
Instr. sg. m. aniyana, Dar. Pers. d. haca aniyana (Jackson, JAOS,
27, 191). 4)with ciy, Nom. sg. n. aniyasciy. Av. anya (Turfan
MSS. 'ani. Middle Pers. an, Oss. inna, Paz. han), Skt. anya.
anuv, prep, with instr. (according to reading ufrat"uva, KT, in
Bh. 1. 19); otherwise Bartholomae, WZKM, 22, 71, along, after.
Av. anu, Skt. anu.
anusiya, adj. devoted to, ally, folloioer. Nom. pi. m. anusiya.
anuv (q. v.) + Ar. suffix tia.
(54 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
apa, verbal prefix, Jrom, away. YAv. apa, Skt. apa, Gr. a.7r6.
apatara, adj. Ace. sg. n. as adv. apataram, aioay from., outside
of, elsewhere. apa(q. v.) + comp. siifSx tara. Skt. apataram.
apadana, n. -palace. Ace. sg. apadana, Art. Ham. imam apadana.
Cf. Skt. apadha, concealment; apa (q. v.) -|- ^da (q. v.).
apanyaka, m. ancestor. Nom. sg. apanyaka (with end. ma, abl.
or = maiy; cf. Foy, KZ, 35, 59), Art. Sus. a. imam apadana dar-
ayavaus apanyakama akunas. apa (q. V.) + nyaka (Phi. nyak).
apara, adj. Ace. sg. n. as adv. aparam, afterwards. The Bab.
sa be-la-a ar-ki-ia, who shdlt rule after 7ne, leads Bartholomae to
suggest ayara-ma., posterior me, in Bh. 4. 5, 14, 19, hya apar^m^ ahy.
Comp. of apa, Av. apara, Skt. apara.
api, f. loater. Nom. sg. apis, Bh. 1. 19. apisim (i. e., apis-sim;
ef. KZ, 35, 36; ibid. 40, 134) parabara; as loc. Pedersen, KZ, 40,
134, es riss ihnfort iin wasser. Loc. sg. apiya, Bh. 1. 19. aniya
apiya [aliyatja (Kern; [aharatja, Oppert, KT). Av. ap (Turf an MSS.
'ab, 'ftp, New Pers. ab, Gil. ov, Afy. oba, Geiger, SA, 4), Skt. nom.
pi. apas.
apiy, adv. on, upon, thereto, still, diiraiy apiy, far and v:ide.
Probably apiy is to be read in Bh. 4, 1. 46. [apjimaiy aniyasciy vasiy
kartam, still much else v:as done by me (cf. KT, 68), thus setting
aside Gray's theory (ava as abl. sg.). Av. aipi, Skt. api, Gr. eti.
abiy, prep, with ace. to, against. GAv. aibi. YAv. aiwi, Skt.
abhi.
abicaris. The reading abacaris with which the critics have op-
erated, Spiegel, Darmesteter (liltud. Iran. 2. 130), Justi (IF, 17,
Anz. l05), is superseded. "My inference from the absence of a
note is that the text stands as first given by Rawlinson, i. e.,
abicaris." Jackson, JAOS, 24, Sr>. The word is thus recorded by
KT who translate pasture-lands. The Elam. and Bab. give no
assistance. Some of the various proposed meanings are: Weide-
pldtze (Spiegel), cf. New Pers. caridan, to pasture; Ililfsmittel
(WB); commerce (Tolman, O. P. Inscr. 121); ipascoU (Rugarli);
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 65
en sauveur (Oppert); servitium = servos (Gray, AJP, 21, 17);
Weide (Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 89).
ab(i)3rpara, an uncertain word in Art. Sus. a; according to Foy
abyapara [u]pa, later under (Artaxerxes).
abis, adv. iherehy. Bh. 1. 18. abis naviya aha. Cf. abiy, Brug-
mann, KZ, 27, 417 vs. Schmidt, Pluralb. S52; Foy, ZDMG, 54,
371; Pedersen, KZ, 40, 129, on opposite side; Bartholomae, Zum
Altiran. Wb., suggests possibly abi-sa (abl.).
ama, pron. stem, Av. ahma; see adam.
amu^a, see mu^.
ayadaiy, see yad.
ayadana, n. sanctuary, place of worship. Ace. pi. ayadana.
Elam. ""^ziyan ""nappanna; Bab. bitati sa ilani. a + *yadana, fr. yad
(q. v.). ayadana (Bh. 1. 14) can hardly be the temples of foreign
gods; cf. Tolman, PAPA, 33, 70 against the view of Foy, KZ,
35, 23.
ayasata, for ayasta of ed. and KT; see yam.
ar (Inchoative pres. rasa-, Bartholomae, Grundr., 135), to set
in motion, go, come, arrive. Pret. 1 sg. arasam. Av. ar (Turfan
MSS. 'avar. New Pers. rasaS), Skt. r.
with prefix para, com,e to, arrive. Pret. 1 sg. pararasam. 3 sg.
jiararasa.
with prefix niy, come down^ descend. Pres. subj. 3 sg.
airasatiy.
araika (or arika, cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 189.), adj.
hostile. Nom. sg. m. araika.
arabaya (Elam. arpaya; Bab. a-ra-bi; Gr. 'Apa/Sia), m. Arabia.
Nom. sg. arabaya.
arakadri (Elam. arakkatarris; Bab. a-ra-ka-ad-ri-'), m. name of a
mountain. Nom. sg. arakadris. Perhaps *ara, mountain + *kadrr,
5
66 ANCIENT PERSIAN LE:^IC0N
ravine. Against the reading and etymology of Foy and Bar-
tholomae, of. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 106. Note also Bartholomae,
Zum Altiran. Wb., 116.
arxa (or araxa, Elam. arakka; Bab. a-ra-hu), m. name of an Ar-
menian rebel. Nom. sg. arxa. Ace. sg. arxam.
ariya, adj. Aryan. Nom. sg. ariya. Members of compound
separated, ariya c^^^ of Aryan lineage, Dar. NR. a. 1, 14. YAv.
airya (New Pers. eran, Horn, NS, 103), Skt. arya.
ariyaramna (wrongly ed., ariyaramaa; cf. KT, 2. Elam. amya-
ramna; Bab. ar-ia-ra-am-na-'; Gr. 'Aptapd/ivijs), m. Ariaramnes, name
of the great-grandfather of Darius. Nom. sg. ariyaramna. Gen.
sg. ariyaramnahya. ariya (nom. pi., q. v.; otherwise Foy, K2, 35,
9) -|- *ramna, fr. *ram, to he or caiise to he at ;peace, YAv. ram,
Skt. ram.
aruvastam? Dar. NR. b. aruvastam upariy [daraya]vau[m] xsaya-
ftyam.
artaxsa^'a (Elam. irtaksassa; Bab. artaksassu; Gr. 'ApTa^ep|i;s; cf.
Lycian artaxssirazaha on Xanthos stele), m. Aj'taxerxes. l)Arta-
xerxes I. Gen. sg. artaxsaff'ahya, artaxsafl'ahya (written artaxsa^rahya in
Art. Ham. See Tolman, Reexamination of Columns, PAPA, 36,
33), artaxsa^'a (for gen. sg.). Art. Pers. a, b. darayavaus artaxsa^'a
xsayaftya pu^'a artaxsa^'^a xsayarsa xsayaftya pu^'a; cf. Marquart,
ZDMG, 49, 665; Thumb, KZ, 32, 130; Foy, KZ, 35, 55. 2)Ar-
taxerxes II. For nom. sg. artaxsa6% Art. Sus. a. fetiy artaxsa^'^a
XS vazarka; also Art. Pers. a, b, 2; Sus. b; cf. Foy, KZ, 35, 57.
For gen. sg. artaxsa^'a, Art. Pers. a, b. adam artaxsa^^'a xsayaftya pu0'a.
3)Artaxerxes III. For nom. sg. artaxsa0% Ai't. Pers. a, b, 2, 3, 4.
fetiy artaxsa^'a. For acc. Sg. artaxsa^'a, Art. Pers. a, b, 1. hya
mam artaxsa^'a xsayaftya akunaus. 'i:)Aftaxe}'Xes !(?), n(?), ni(?),
of. Weissbach, Iran. Gr. II, 60, 18; Longp6rier, RA, 2, 446; Foy,
KZ, 35, 58. Nom. sg. ardaxcasc(?)a, Vase of Artaxerxes (Venice).
This is the reading of the editions and generally accepted (cf.
Foy, KZ, 37, 565; Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 192), sc being re-
garded as a phonetic representation of 0' (Elam. ss; Bab. ts).
The vase, however, as far as I can infer from the photographs
which I have seen, clearly gives ardaxcasda, showing an uncut
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 67
space between d* and the mutilated word-divider. Either we
must suppose that the engraver omitted the small horizontal
wedge which differentiated c* and a", or we must accept the read-
ing ardaxcasda. *arta, fe/", Av. arata + xsa^'a, hlngdom (q. V.).
artavardiya (Elam. irtumartiya; Bab. ar-ta-mar-zi-ia), m. name of
one of the generals of Darius. Nom. sg. artavardiya. Ace. sg.
artavardlyam. *arta, few, Av. arsta + *vard, to increase^ Av. varad
(New Pers. baiidan), Skt. vrdh.
ardaxcasc(?)a, see artaxsa^'"a.
ardastana, m. uHiidoio-cornice (?). Nom. sg. ardastana, Dar.
Pers. C. ardastana a^a"gaina darayavahauS XShya viftya karta. *arda,
half, YAv. arada + stana, YAv. -stana (New Pers. stan), Skt. sthana;
cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 193. Foy, KZ, 35, 48. connects,
the first member of the compound with Av. arazo, hright, Skt..
rjra.
o
ardumanis (Elam. [artumannls] ; Bab. a-ar-di-ma-ni-is), m. name of
one of the allies of Darius against Gaumata. Nom. sg. ar[dtuna]-
n[is]. *ardu, right, GAv.arazu, Skt. rju -\- *manis, mind, Av. manah,
Skt. manas.
arbaira (Elam. arpera; Bab. ar-ba-'il), f. Arbela. Loc. sg. arbai-
raya.
armina (Elam. arminiya; Bab. u-ra-as-tu; Gr. 'Ap/jLevLo), m. Arme-
nia. Nom. sg. armina. Acc. Sg. arminam. Loc. sg. arminaiy.
arminiya, adj. as subs. l)Armenian. 2)Armema. Nom. sg.
m. arminiya. Loc. Sg. m. arminiyaiy (thus read in Bh. 2. 11. 34, 39,
44 in place of armaniyaiy of ed., and to be supplied in Bh. 2. 11.
48, 63; cf. KT, 29). Written arm-niyaiy in Bh. 2. 11. 34, 39, 44.
arsaka, m. Arsaces. Nom. sg. arsaka. *arsan, man, YAv.
arsan, Gr. apcr-qv -f- sufEx ka.
arsada (Elam. irsata), f. name of a fortress. Nom. sg. arsada.
Cf. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 106.
C8 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
arsama (Elam. irsama; Gr. 'A/[)o-d/*i;s), m. Arsames, name of
the grandfather of Darius. Nom. sg. arsama. Gen. sg. arsama-
hya. *arsan, man, hero (of. arsaka) + *ama, might, YAv. ama.
arsta (for arstata; "the sign is quite clearly r and not b on the
rock" KT), f. Rectitude. Ace. sg. arstam, Bh. 4. 13. upany ars-
tam upariy + + + ^; Elam. gutur ukku hupa git, I ruled in, accordance
with the ordinance; Bab. ina di-na-a-tu a-si-ig-gu, in accordance with
the laws I governed. The old reading of Eawlinson abastam was
nearer correct than the later abistam, as Jackson (JAOS, 24, 91)
and KT clearly indicate the absence of i in the word, arsta was
first conjectured by Foy (KZ, 35, 45) and later confirmed by
Jackson's reexamination of the Behistan Rock. We cannot,
however, accept Toy's further conjecture apariyayam, ich verehrte
die aufrichtiglceit, as Jackson and KT record the presence of the
second upariy on the stone; cf. Tolman (Vdt. Stud. 1, 32). The
emended reading has an important bearing on the religion of the
Achaemenidan kings: cf. Jackson, JAOS, 21, 169; Foy, ZDMG,
64, 341; Wilhelm, ibid. 40, 105; Tolman, PAPA, 33, 67. Weiss-
bach (ZDMG, 61, 733) would emend the Bab. u-sa-as-gu-u. YAv.
arstat, goddess of rectitude, f r. arsta, upright.
argti, f . sj)ear. Nom. sg. arstis. YAv. arsti, Skt. rsti.
arstibara, m. spear-hearer. Nom. sg. arstibara. arsti (q. v.) -|-
*bara, fr. bar (q. v.).
ava, demon, pron. that. Ace. sg. m. avam. Gen. sg. m. ava-
hya. Acc. Sg. n. ava, avas-ciy. Nom. pi. m. avaiy. Nom. pi, f.
ava, NRa. 4. As acc. pi. m. avaiy, Bh. 2. 13. avaiy fra-
ha^jam. Gen. pi. m. avaisam (cf. Turfan MSS. 'ovesan). I. E.
ouo, Av. ava (New Pers. 6, Kurd. af).
ava, verbal prefix, doicn, e. g. ava -(- jan, to stril'e down. Av.
ava (Middle Pers. 6), Skt. ava.
ava, adv. tJnis. Correlative to yafe, Bh. 4. 1. 51. ava naiy astiy
kartam ya^a, reading confirmed by KT. Cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud.
1, 32.
avakanam, a reading confirmed by KT in Bh. 1. 18. maskauva
.avakanam, I jilaccd{i)iij army) on floats of shins; cf. Tolman, Vdt.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 69
Stud. 1, 15. Pedersen, KZ, iO, 133, translates, Ick setzte das
heer anf. The attempted emendation avakamam, fr. kart, to cut,
divide, is superseded.
avajam, Bh. 2. 13, 14. utasaiy [u]ca§ma avajam (a-vajam or a-va°jam,
Bartholomae), I put out his eyes, Cf. KZ, 37, 554. Jackson
(JAOS, 24-, 88) remarks: "The sight is destroyed by means of
a red-hot iron brought near the ball. This latter observation
may throw some additional light on the meaning of avajam. The
reading of this word is beyond question." See ucasma. The
sense of both Elam. and Bab. version is as given above.
ava^a, adv. l)thus, 2)then. Bh. 4. 10. nuram (Jackson, JAOS,
24, 90; KT, 69) Ouvam vamavatam tya mana kartam avafe sa + + + d
+ + + adiy, let it noiv convince thee what has been done hy me, so
+ + +■ In Dar. NRa. 4 Stolze's photograph shows [avad]a or [ava^]a
where Foy, KZ, 36, 51 reads [ava]da. Bartholomae, by reference
to M6nant and Daressy (Recueil de trav.) reads ava^a yafe for
pa[s]ava of ed. in 1. 11 of Dar. Sz. c, 3. YAv. ava^a.
ava^asta pari[ba]ra, thus preserve them (i. e. the sculptures),
reading of KT for ava avaiy parikara of ed. in Bh. 4. 1. 72. See
bar. Hoffmann-Kutschke would take the first word as avafe sta,
stand thou (as I stand with subdued rebels before me).
avada, adv. Vjthere, 2)thither, 3)haca avadasa (i. e. avada + sa,
abl. sg. pr(m. ; cf . Bartholomae, BB, 14, 247. Foy, KZ, 35, 29,
on the other hand compares Lat. sed, e. g., sed fraude), therefrom,
thence. [a]vada for [a]da[raya] of ed. is to be read in Bh. 2. 1. 29,
followed by a lacuna affording, as KT record, "scarcely room
for more than two signs. The traces of the last sign seem to be
those of n" or h°'." Can we supply aha, there he did not abide ?
Cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 18. YAv. avaSa (Turfan MSS. '5od,
Bal. 6da).
avapara, adv. there along, there hefore. Read thus in Bh. 2.
1. 72 for avada of ed. ; cf. KT, 35. Bh. 3, 12. arsada nama dida
[ha]rauvatiya avapara atiyais (Bartholomae, Grundr.- 360). KT
plainly record the reading avapara, thus setting aside Foy's con-
jecture avadapara. ava (acc. sg. n.) + *para, lefore, Av. para, Skt.
pura.
70 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
avast[a]ya[m], reading of KT in Bh. 4. 1. 91, in which Weiss-
bach (ZDMG, 61, 730) sees a possible reference to the Avesta.
avahana, n. dwelling place. Nom. sg. avahanam. Skt. vasana.
a -\- *vah, to dwell, YAv. vah, Skt. vas.
avahya, to ask aid, Implore. Denominative of *avah, Av.
avah; cf. Skt. avasya.
with prefix patiy, seek for help, supplicaft'. j\lid. pret. 1
sg. patiyavahyaiy, Bh. 1. 13. adam auramazdam patiyavahyaiy, IjJrayed
Ahura Mazda for help. "The true reading of the radical part
of the word is ^vahyaiy ( — v^'h'^y V, with hy, not y) as is plainly
shown in a photograph which I took of it when I examined the
Behistan Rock in 1903. The verb patiyavahyaiy is therefore nat-
urally to be connected, as a denominative, with Av. avah-, avahya-,
aid, assistance, support, cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 179,
and see especially Friedrich Mtiller in WZKil, 1, 122, and Tol-
man, OP. Insc. p. 167; and it is precisely the Iranian equivalent
of the Sanskrit denominative avasya-, seeh for aid, tule refuge
with, in Rig Veda, 1, 116. 23 (avasyate, dat. pres. ptcpl.)." Jack-
son, JAOS, 27, 190. KT confirm Jackson's reading thus re-
moving all possible connection with the root van (Bartholomae,
ZDMG, 48, 156; Foy, KZ, 37, 518). For Bartholomae's later
view, see Zum Altiran. Wb., 217. The same scholar writes me
in a personal letter: ''Die Turf anhandschrif ten bieten padvahid,
padvaham, padvahisn, u. s. w, alle im Sinn des lat. siipplicari."
avahyaradiy, adv. fv this reason, therefore, avahya (for avah-
yaya, loc. sg. f . ; cf . Bartholomae, Grundr. 239, 2) -|- *radiy, loc.
sg. cause. New Pers. ra; cf. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 91.
av°h''[r + +] thus read in place of av[arada] of ed. in Bh. 2. 1.
94. a[va]m kara av''h''[r + +], the people forsook him. The Elam.
version makes the sense certain. The Bab. is wanting. KT
record: "The traces of the sign following h are probably those
of r. There is room for one more sign in this Avord.'' In Vdt.
Stud. 1, 22, I suggested the supplement avahar[ja], Skt. avasrjat,
{thejjeoph) cast off allegiance to him, which seems quite certain
when we compare Turfan MSS. herz. Weissliach (ZDMG, 61,
726) suggests avahar[ta], part. perf. to *har, Skt. sar, loeggeHaufen
seiend.
ANOIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 71
asa, m. horse. Ace. sg. asam (in collective sense), Bh. 1. 18.
aniyahya asam franayam, Jvr the rest I hrought horses. This is
plainly the reading of the stone. Jackson records: "The read-
ing asm + + of Spiegel, Kossowicz, and Tolman, or tasma[kam] of
Fr. MuUer, WZKM, 1, 222, and as[pa] of Weissbach and Bang,
though the latter were on the right track, must be abandoned.
The word is simply asam, horse. " KT confirm Jackson's reading.
The conclusion of Gray (AJP, 21, 7) concerning a double repre-
sentation by sp and s of Iranian sp is hereby shown to be cor-
rect; cf. Horn, Grundr. d. neupers. Etym., 160, 749. See s.
V. aspa.
asagarta (Elam. assakartiya; Bab. sa-ga-ar-ta-a-a), m. Sagartia.
Nom. sg. asagarta. Acc. Sg. asagartam. Loc. Sg. asagartaiy. Against
Bartholomae's etymology cf. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 114, asa (q. v.)
+ *garta, Skt. garta, wagon. Note also Bartholomae, Zum Alti-
ran. Wb., 120.
asagartiya, adj. Sagartian. Nom. sg. m. asagartiya.
asabari (thus read since Jackson's and KT's confii-mation of
asa against Bartholomae's asbari for aspabari, Altiran. Wb., 219;
Htibschmann, ZDMG, 36, 133; Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 114; Peder-
sen, KZ, 40, 133), adj. mounted on horses, horsemen. Instr. pi.
asabaribis. New Pers. suvar. asa (q. V.) -f bari, fr. bar (q. v.).
[aspa, in composition, horse. YAv. aspa (New Pers. asp, Afy.
aspa, f., Oss. afsa, Kurd, hasp, Socin, SK, 9), Skt. acva].
aspacanah, name of Persian, Aspathmes. Nom. sg. aspacana,
Dar. NRd. *aspa (q. v.) -|- *caiiah, n., desire, YAv. -cinah, Skt.
asman, m. V)stone, ^yir-mament, heamen. Acc. sg. asmanam
(written asmanam in Art. Pers. a, b). YAv. asman (Turfan MSS.
'asmftn. New Pers. asman. Gab. asban), Skt. acman. Cf. KZ, 39,
69; Wackernagel, Ai. Gram. 71.
asnaiy, a doubtful word in Bh. 2. 4. adam asnaiy aham abiy uva-
jam. The Elam. renders kanna enni git. WB and KT translate
both Persian and Elam., I was friendly with Susiana. I think
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
it doubtful if Elam. kanna means friendly, for it is not likely
that [akka kannas] is the correct supplement for the Elam. corres-
ponding to Persian agV + +, Bh. 1, 8; of. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1,
9. Bartholomae (Altiran. Wb. , 264) regards asnaiy as loc. sg. to
asna, march, i. e., I tuas on the march to Susiana. The Elam.
passage is discussed by Foy (KZ, 35, 37), who favors the inter-
pretation, aufdem marsche. The Bab. gives no assistance. Cf .
Bartholomae, Grundr. 1, 31; Foy, ZDMG, 52, 567.
azda, adv. hunon (Bartholomae, IF, 9, 279; nom. sg. azda.
Johansson, IF, 2, 28). Bh. 1. 10. karahy[a naiy] azda abava, it was
not Tcnoxon to the peoj>le. GAv. azda (Middle Pers. azd, Af y. zda,
Geiger, SA, 7), Skt. addha.
[ah (text, + + + + a), to throw. Pass, indie, pret. 3 sg. [ahyatja,
Bh. 1. 19. aniya api[y]a [ahyatja, tlis enemy (Foy, the other part) were
driven into the water. Rugarli, il nemico fu gettato nelV acqua.
Cf. Kern, ZDMG, 23, 239; Foy, KZ, 37, 554. Bartholomae,
AF, 1, 61, first suggested ahadata (had = Skt. sah), but later (Alt-
iran. Wb., 279) favors Kern's reading. WB, [a]ha°[jat]a (ha^j =
Skt. sanj); Oppert (Le peuple — des Mfedes, 169 [a]ha[ra]ta (har =
Skt. sar) which Gray favors in AJP, 21, 22, and which KT sup-
ply, remarking: "There is room for this restoration on the
rock;" they translate the Elam., / drove tJiem into the river.
The Bab. gives no assistance. YAv. ah, Skt. as.]
ah (Pres. ah-, h-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 122), to ie. Act. indie,
pres. 1 sg. amiy. 3 sg. astiy. 1 pi. amahy. 3 pi. ha"tiy. Pret. 1
Sg. aham. 3 Sg. aha. 3 pi. aha". Subj. 2 Sg. ahy (for a^'ahiy.
Wrongly read in ed. and KT, ahy. The subjunctive is certain as
seen in such a phrase as tuvam ka hya aparam Imam dlpi[m] patiparsa-
hy, t?i/m whosoever shalt hereafter read this iiiscription ; cf. Tol-
man, Vdt. Stud. 1, 30). 3 sg. ahatly. Mid. pret. 3 pi. aha'4:a
(written aha"ta in Bh. 3. 11. 49, 51). Av. ah, Skt. as.
1,1
i (Pres. ai-, i-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 122), to go. Indie, pres.
3 sg. aitiy. Aor. 3 sg. ais° (read ais or ai§a with thematic vowel).
Av. i (New Pers. ayaS), Skt. 1.
Sz. c. 3.
ANCIENT PiERSIAN LEXICON 73
with prefix a, come. Pret. 3 pi. aya"ta (thematic), Dar.
(see aiS").
with prefix atiy, go ieyond, go along. Aor. 3 sg. atiyais*
with prefix abiy(?) or upa(?), go unto, arrive. Pret. 1 sg.
[abiyjayam (Foy, ZDMG, 54, 363), [upjayam (WB, KT), Bh. 1. 19.
afty (sic; of. KT, 19) babiru[m yafe naiy upjayam.
with prefix upariy(?). In upariy[ayam], Bh. 4. 13, upariy is
clearly seen on the stone (Jackson and KT); ayam, however, is
very doubtful. "Instead of ayam naiy, it looks more like a long
word ending in h''iy or i''iy — the former h^iy is, however, better,
and it seems so to be clear," JAOS, 24, 93. KT read without
comment + + + + naiy. The obliquely meeting wedges initial in
the cuneiform sign for h, which alone differentiate it from that
for n, may of course be in the preceding lacuna. In Vdt. Stud.
1, 32, 1 proposed the rather desperate supplement upariy [axsayaiy]
naiy; see xsi. Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 729) reads upariy arstam
upariy [ayam], nach dem Gesetze hdbe ich geherrsclit. Jackson's and
KT's confirmation of upariy makes impossible Foy's conjecture
apariyayam, KZ, 35, 45. For Rawlinson's upariy mam Jackson sug-
gests the meaning beyond measure.
with prefix nij (Bartholomae, Grundr. 269, 2, n. 1), go
forth. Pret. 1 sg. nijayam.
with prefix patiy, to come tmto, he one^s possession. Aor.
3 pi. patiyaisa" (with thematic vowel, Bartholomae, Grundr. 329,
360).
with prefix para, go forth, proceed. Impv. pres. 2 sg.
paraidiy. Pret. 2 pi. (Injunctive, Bartholomae, Grundr. 166),
paraita. Part. nom. pi. paraita.
ap^riy^ay" of ed. and KT (Bh. 1. 8) is to be read apanyaya"
for a^apariyaya"; see hapariya.
ida, adv. here. YAv. iSa, Skt. iha.
74 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
ima, demon, pron. this. Ace. sg. m. imam. Ace. sg. n. ima
(KT record auramazdam[aiy] Ima for auramazda mana of ed. in Bh. 1.
1. 26). Acc. sg. f. imam. Nom. acc. pi. m. imaiy (Bartholomae,
Grundr. 240). Acc. pi. n. ima. Nom. acc. pi. f. ima. Gen. pi. m.
imaisam (thus read for imisam of KT; of. Weissbach, ZDMG, 61,
730), Bh. 4. 87. tyam imaisam martiyanam taimiam [ubart]a[m] par-
[ibarja, die NacKkommenschaft dieser Manner hehiite woJd,
Weissbach (op. cit.), who observes that ideogram GIJl^, family,
is to be supplied before appa (m)ruh(id) appi ir kuktas of Elam. ver-
sion, while in Bab. there is preserved a trace of ziru before sabe.
Av. ima (Turfan MSS. Im, New Pers. im-), Skt. ima. Note Tur-
fan MSS. 'imdsan < imaisam.
imanis (Elam. ummannis; Bab. im-ma-ni-e-su), m. name assumed
by Martiya in his insurrection in Susiana. Bh. 2. 3; 4. 2; f.
iyam (*i-am, Bartholomae, Grundr. 236), demon, pron. this.
Nom. sg. m. iyam. In Dar. NRe. iyam maciya, Bartholomae
suggests the emendation imV (imaiy), Nom. sg. f . iyam. In Bh.
4. 1. 90, the form according to KT seems to be written iya;
"This would be certain if the reading of the division wedge be-
fore i were clear upon the rock;" cf. Bartholomae, WZKM, 22,
%Q. Skt. ayam, m., iyam, f., GAv. ayim, m.
i + + a (text as confirmed by KT who record space for two
signs in the middle of the word. i[zar]a, Tolman, in place of
[iz]i[tus] of the ed. which the Elam. izzila, wrongly read before
izzitu, makes impossible; cf. Vdt. Stud. 1, 20), f. name of a dis-
trict in Assyria. Nom. sg. i[zar]a, Bh. 2. 10. i[zar]a nama dah-
yaus a^uraya. Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 726) proposes i[zal]a.
is, to put in motion, send. Av. is, Skt. is.
with prefix fra, send forth. Caus. pret. 1 sg. fraisayam.
3 sg. fraisaya.
isunam, reading of WB in Dar. NRd. isunam daraya^ta, Pfeil-
hewahrer. Bartholomae, isuvam daraya^ta. Hoffmann-Kutschke,
Iran, decanam darayanta = Elam. tenim kuktikra, Trdger der Gesetzes-
tafeln, Or. Lit. Ztg., Sept., 1906. Old reading isuvam dasayama,
cf . Justi, ZDMG, 50, 663; Gray, AJP, 21, 2; Foy, ZDMG, 55, 514.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 75
u, u
u (before vowels uv), adv. (in composition), good, well, e. g.
ufrastam, well punlsJied, umartiya, j>oa's. good laen, uvaspa, poss. good
liorms. Av. hu, Skt. su, Gr. i-yn;s, well living (cf. ^tos; Brug-
mann, Gr. Gram.' 98, 2).
[ukarta]m, (+ + + + m, KT.), a mutilated word in Bh. 4. 1. 76.
Prom the traces of wedges given by KT I proposed (AJP, under
date of Feb. 1908) the reading [ukartajm kunautuv, maij he make
it well done (i. e. successful), which corresponds closely with
the Elam. aiak kutta appa huttanti huhpe *°uramasta azzasne, and
^chatsoever tJwu doest, this may Ahura Mazda cause to succeed.
In case the word-divider is mutilated (which is quite likely), the
obliquely-meeting wedges suggest initial u. The two small hor-
izontals (if the second be slightly lower) may be the sign for k,
while the three parallel horizontals are probably what remains
of r. vazarkam (Oppert, Foy) is also possible, but the word cer-
tainly did not begin with m, as Rawlinson supposed (mazanam,
WB^; mafttam, Bartholomae).
[u]c''s*m% eye. Ace. sg. Hc^s^m*, Bh. 2. 13, 14. utasaiy [uJc^sV^
avajam, and I put out his eyes. KT regard the sign s as quite clear
and c as fairly certain, while the first sign appears as u. Jack-
son, however, feels less certain; "The obliterated word yielded
no new results. The internal letter looks more like an h than it
does like an s, but the likeness between the two letters in the
cuneiform character leads easily to misapprehension " (J AGS, 24,
88). Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 726) proposes the reading ucasma,
=hu-casma, comparing the Av. hu-xsnao^ra. Jackson would inter-
pret KT's reading as word-divider -f casma. Note Turf an MSS.
casm.
uta, conj. and. The tendency of vasna auramazdaha to begin the
clause places that phrase before uta in Bh. 2. 1; 4. 8; but Bar-
tholomae's proposed emendation [uta]maiy (Bh. 4. 1. 46) based on
this principle is now set aside by KT's reading [apjimaiy. Correl.
with ca Bh. 1. 14. adam karam ga^ava avastayam parsam[c]a madaiii[c]a
uta aniya dahyava. uta — uta, loth — and, Bh. 1. 12. adlna ka^bujiyam
uta parsam uta madam uta aniya dahyava. YAv. uta (Turfan MSS.
'ud), Skt. uta.
76 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
utana (Elam. huttana; Bab. u-mi-it-ta-na-'; Gr. 'Ordv??;), m. Otanes,
name of one of the allies of Darius against Gaumata. Nom. sg.
[u]ta[na].
ud, us, adv. up, forth, e. g. udapatata, Bh. 2. 5, et passim; us-
tasana, Art. Pera. 1. 3. Av. us (Middle Pers. uz, New Pers. zi; cf.
Horn, Grundr. d. neupers. Etym. 143), Skt. ud.
upa, l)adv. unto, to. Bh. 1. 19. a^iy (sic) babiru[m ya^a naiy up]-
ayam (WB; KT). 2)prep. with ace. to, iy. Bh. 3. 6. karam par-
sam uta madam fraisayam hya upa mam aha. Av. upa, Skt. upa. Cf.
Jud. Pers. awaz < upaca.
upadara"ma (Oppert, Le peuple — des M^des; Gray, AJP, 21,
19. Elam. ukpa _,. + ranma), m. name of the father of A^^'ina, Bh.
1. 16. Gen. sg. upadara^mahya. upadarma, der Ordnung (cf. Skt.
dharma) untertan, Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb. , 390. Cf . Hiising,
Ii-. En. 14, 38.
upariy, prep, with ace. above, over, upany arstam upaiiy + + + +
(Jackson; KT), Bh. 4. 13. YAv. upairi (New Pers., Kurd, bar),
Skt. upari.
upasta, f . help, aid. Ace. sg. upastam. YAv. upasta; upa + sta
(q. v.).
ufrasta (thus read in Bh. 4. 1. 38; cf. KT, 66: elsewhere writ-
ten ufrasta), part, pass., well punished. Bartholomae formerly
read ufrasata, part, with gerundive meaning, "Whitney, Skt. Gr.
1176, e., but has just recently changed his view (WZKM, 22,
76), owing to the corrected reading ufrasta. For interchange of
s and 8 note the Turfan manuscripts (F. W. K. Miiller, SBAW,
1904, I; n, 1907). Ace. sg. m. ufrastam (ufrastam). u -f- frasta, fr.
fras, to ask, examine, punish, Av. fras (New Pers. pursad), Skt.
prchati.
ufrasti (thus read in Bh. 4. 1. 69 in place of ahifrasti of ed. ; cf .
KT, 73), f. severe pmiiKliment. Loc. sg. ufrasta + adiy (q. v.).
u + frasti, GAv. farasti, fr. fras; inchoative pres. parsa (q. v.).
ufratu (Elam. upra[tu]; Bab. purattu; Gr. Ei.^paTiys), m. Eu-
plirates. ufrat^uva (thus written on the stone in Bh. 1. 1. 92 in
AA'CZBAT PERSIAN LEXICON 77
place of ufratauva of ed. ; cf . KT, 19. Bartholomae (WZKM. 22,
71) regards the case as gen. sg. with anuv (cf. schol. to Panini, 2.
1. 16, gangaya anu). In Vdt. Stud. 1, 16, I cite this form as a
possible instance of anuv with instr. sg. According to Justi, IF,
17, Anz. 116, u (q. v.) + *tra.t3i,fire (cf. Arm. hrat), dem das Ue'il-
ige Feuer gut oder gnadlg ist. It seems more probable, how-
ever, that the last element of the compound is a foreign word.
Bartholomae favors a " Volksetymologie. "
ubarta, part, pass., well esteemed. Bartholomae formerly fa-
vored ubarata, part, with gerundive meaning, but has now re-
turned to the older view; see s. v. ufrasta. Ace. sg. ubartam.
u + bar (q. v.).
umartiya, adj. possessing good men. Nom. sg. f. wnartiya.
Nom. sg. n. umartiyam. u -|- martiya (q. V.).
u[yam]a (supplied from Elam. uiyama), f . name of a fortress in
Armenia. The reading u[hy]ama of ed. is impossible; cf, KT,
30. Nom. sg. u[yam]a, Bh. 2. 9.
uvaipasiya, n. own possession (Elam. tuman-e). Ace. sg. uvai-
pasiyam, Bh. 1. 12. hauv ayasata uvaipaMyam akuta, he seised {the
power and) made it his own possession. KT give the traditional
translation, he did according to his will, which is impossible as
the meaning is clear from both Elam. (see above) and Bab. + + ti
a-na sa ra-ma-ni-su ut-te-ir, he toolc it for himself; cf . Tolman, Vdt.
Stud. 1, 11. YAv. x'^aepai^a, own, *uvai, Av. x^ae- (as dat. to x'^a,
Skt. sva) -j- *pasiya, Av. *pai^a, fr. *paiti, selbst (Bartholomae)
gehorig (Foy; das, woriiber man herr ist).
uvaxstra (Elam. maMstarra; Bab. u-ma-ku-is-tar; Gr. Kva^apiys), m.
Cyaxares; cf . Tolman and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires of the
East, 68. Gen. sg. uvaxstrahya, uvaxstrahya. u -|- *vaxstra, fr. *vaxs,
gjvw, Av. vaxs (Middle Pers. vaxsltan), Skt. vaks. Justi (Iran.
Namenbuch, 140), retains the old reading uvaxsatara, regarding it
a comparative of u -f- vaxsa, growth.
uvaja (Elam. alpirti; Bab. e-lam-mat), m. 8usiam,a. Nom. sg.
uvaja. Acc. sg. uvajam. Loc. Sg. uvajaiy. Hilbschmann, Pers.
Stud. 214, (h)uvza; Foy, KZ, 35, 62, comparing Skt. aja translates
zlegenreich; cf. KZ, 37, 542.
78 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
uvajiya, adj. Susian. Nona. sg. uvajiya. Nom. pi. uvajiya.
Instr. pi. uvajiyaibis, Bh. 5. 1. 10, [hamaranam a]kuna[us hada] uvaji-
yaibis, ( Goiryas) waged hattle with the Susians.
uvadaicaya (Elam. matezis + 4.), m. name of a Persian town.
Nom. sg. uvadaicaya.
uvamarsiyu, adj. dyiTig hy one's own hand. Nom. sg. uvamar-
siyus, Bh. 1. 11. pasava ka°bujiya uvamarsiyus amariyata, afterwards
Cambyses died ly his own hand, i. e. by suicide or by accident;
cf. Hdt. 3, 62. "As he was leaping on his horse the blade of
his sword struck his thigh." See Marquart, Philol. Suppl. 6,
621. *uva, Av. x^a, Skt. sva + *marsiyu, Av. maxadyvi, Skt. mrtyu, fr.
mar (q. v.).
uvarazm'l (Elam. marasmiya; Bab. hu-ma-ri-iz-mu), f. Ghorasmia.
Nom. sg. uvarazmis. Cf. YAv. x^airizgm, Bartholomae, Grundr.
402, n. 2. Ir. -zmi-, Skt. jmas, Gr. x«A«»', Toy, KZ, 35, 1, 23;
Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 113, Schoen^land.
uvarazm'iya, adj. Nom. sg. m. uvarazm'iya in collective sense,
Chorasmia. Bh. 1. 6; Dar. Pers. e. 2.
uvaspa, adj. possessing good horses. Nom. sg. f . uvaspa. Nom.
sg. n. [uvaspam], Dar. Sz. c. 1. u + aspa (q. v.).
ustasana, f. staircase, Bawmerk (WB), Treppe (Bartholomae).
Ace. sg. ustasanam, Art. Pers. a, b, 3. imam ustasanam a^a^ganam
mam upa mam karta. Foy (KZ, 35, 60) reads ustacanam (= ustasanam,
cf . xsayarcaliya, Art. Sus. a, 1) in Art. Sus. c. imam + + + + + +
canam tya afe-gainam. us (see ud) + *tasana, fr. *tas, cut, fashion,
Av. tas, Skt. taks.
usabari (Jackson; "An examination and reexamination of the
rock proves the certainty of this reading." KT; "The reading
of the signs u§a is certain"), adj. Jackson suggests lorne ly
oxen ( ?), Av. uxsan, Skt. uksan. Bartholomae's ustrabari, mounted on
ca?;2tV.s, 'possible on the theory that the stone-cutter failed to write
t''r% agi-ees with the sense of the Elam. version; cf. Tolman,
Vdt. Stud. 1, 15. Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 725) suggests usa as a
"Nebenform" to ustra. The numerous conjectures, several of
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 79
which seemed plausible before this confirmation of Oppert's
reading, must now be set aside, e. g. asabari (Mtiller, WZKM, 1,
220), maisabarl (ibid. 11, 252), isubari (Gray, AJP, 21, 20) etc. ; cf .
the literature in KZ, 38, 259. Ace. sg. m. usabarim, Bh. 1. 18.
aniyam usabarim akunavam aniyahya asam franayam, the one {po/rt of my
army) I put on camels; for the other I hrougld horses.
uska, adj. dry; n. dry land, mainland. Gen. sg. n. uskahya,
Dar. Pers. e. 2. yaima tyaiy uskahya. YAv. huska (New Pers. xusk,
Afy. vuc).
uzma, adj. wliat is up from, the earth; n. stake, pile. Loc. sg.
uzmaya (i. e. — ai + postpos. a) with patiy. Bh. 2. 13. uzmayapatiy
akunavam, I crucified him. ud (q. v.) -|- *zam, earth (Turf an MSS.
zamlg); cf. Bartholomae, Grundr. 219, 2; Foy, KZ, 37, 529;
Wackernagel, Ai. Gram. 72. Nearly the exact equivalent ap-
pears in the Turfan MSS. qar6nd dftrobadag (Bartholomae; da-
rtibadag, Mtiller), they will crucify; qar6nd< kar; daro, cf.
New Pers. dar, wood; bad < patiy.
K
ka, particle giving to preceding tuvam, thou, an indefinite force.
Bab. man-nu at-ta sarru sa be-la-a ar-M-ia = Pers. tuvam [ka] xsaya[6]iya
hya aparam ahy, Bh. i. 19, thou lohosoever shalt he Icing hereafter.
Cf. Gray (JAOS, 23, 60) who rejects Kern's view in Caland,
Synt. der Pron. 47, and regards ka as correspondent to the Do-
ric Ko. (I. E. qa) with a generalizing power.
ka, l)interrog. pronoun, who? 2)indef . with ciy, any. Nom.
sg. m. kasciy. Acc. sg. n. cisciy. Cf. Bartholomae, Grundr. 415.
Av. ka (New Pers. ki, Oss. ka), Skt. ka. Note Turfan MSS. ke.
kaufa, m. hill, mountain. Nom. sg. kaufa. YAv. kaofa (Phi.
kof, New Pers. koh).
katpatuka (Elam. katpatukas; Bab. ka-at-pa-tuk-ka; Gr. Ka7r7raSo«ta),
m. Cappadoda. Nom. sg. katpatuka.
so ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
kan, to dig, chisel out. Pres. inf. ka°tanaiy. The ed. supply
akamy(Aor. pass. 3 sg.)in the mutilated portion of Dar. Sz. c. 3.
iyam yuviya [akaniy]. YAv. kan (New Pers. kandan), Skt. khan.
with prefix niy, obliterate, cause to he forgotten. Pres.
impv. 3 sg. nika"tuv.
with prefix viy (thus I read in Bh. 4, 11. 71, 73, 77 against
KT's visan-; of. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 34. The question involves
simply the absence of a medial wedge in the cuneiform sign.
Jackson in all these places records the k as fairly clear. So too
the Elam. sari points to the certainty of the reading — kan-; cf.
Weissbach, ZDMG, 61, 729), destroy. Pres. subj. 2 sg. vikanahy,
Bh. 4. 11. 71, 73. vikanah(i)dis, Bh. 4. 1. 77. Pret. 3 sg. viyaka",
Bh. 1. 14.
ka'^pada (ka°pa"da, Foy, KZ, 37, 531. Elam. kampantas), m.
name of a district in Media. Nom. sg. ka"pada. Cf . Hiising, Ir.
En. 38.
kapisakani (Elam. kappissakanis), f. name of a fortress in Ara-
chosia. Nom. sg. kapisakanis.
ka"bu jiya (Elam. kanpuziya; Bab. kam-bu-zi-ia; Gr. Ka/iySuVrys), m.
Cambyses. Nom. sg. ka'^bujiya. Ace. sg. ka'^bujiyam. Gen. sg.
ka"bujiyaliya. Abl. Sg. ka^bujiya, Bh. 1. 11. kara haruva hami^'iya
abava haca ka^bujiya, the vjhole people became confederate from Cam-
byses. ka"bu + jiya, mit Sehium cms — ?, Bartholomae, Altiran.
Wb., 437. kam, Skt. kam + buj, Skt. bhuj, glncl-geniessend,', Foy,
KZ, 35, 62. Cf. KZ, 37, 543; Justi, Iran. Namenbuch, 490.
kama, m. desire, vnsh. Nom. sg. kama, Bh. 4. 4. yafe mam
kama, as iras my will. Av. kama.
kamna, adj. fno. Nom. sg. n. kamnam, Bh. 2. 6. kara parsa
u[ta m]ada hya upa mam aha hauv kamnam aha, the Persian and the
Median army, %chich vKis by me, this v:as sviall. For a like use
of the neuter we can compare [t]ya ciyakaram a[va dahy]a[va], Dar.
NRa. 4. Foy (KZ, 35, 38) would read kamnama regarding the
word as a superl. formation. I suggested ("\'dt. Stud. 1, 18) the
possible reading kamnama (i. e. kamna, nom. sg. m. -f ma = maiy),
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 81
though the objections to assuming ma = maiy cannot be denied;
of. apanyakama, Art. Sus. a. The Elam. version shows no pro-
noun here. Instr. pi. kamnaibis. yA^^ kamna (New Pers. kam).
kar (Pres. kunau-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 131; Wackernagel,
Ai. Gram. 29), to do, make. Act. pres. subj. 2 sg. kunavahy.
Impy. 3 sg. kimautuv (wrongly transliterated kunutuv by KT in
Eh. 4. 16, for n% not n", plainly appears in the cuneiform text).
Pret. indie. 1 sg. akunavam. 3 sg. akunauS (akunas is written in
Art. Sus. a. 4; cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 540). 1 pi. akunauma?, Art.
Hamadan, 1. 7 (akuna ma is written on the stone). I examined in
1905 these Moldings of Columns from Ecbatana and noted
clearly the presence of the word-divider. We cannot doubt
that we are dealing with a stone-cutter's blunder. I proposed
(PAPA, 36, 32) the epigraphical emendation akunauma, involving
the joining at right angles of the first perpendicular wedge with
the horizontal above in the cuneiform sign for a and the raising
of the oblique word-divider to a horizontal position above the
two remaining perpendicular strokes. The restored form would
be the first person plural of the nu class, built, however, against
the rule on the strong stem, as illustrated by akunava", akunava"ta.
The Persian akuma (Ir. akr-ma) is, of course, outside this class.
The same form I would supply in the lacuna of 1. 5, where I
spoke of a possible reference to the combined work of Achae-
menidan kings. Bartholomae (Altiran. Wb., 444) emends aku-
navam. Cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 540. 3 pi. akunava". Aor. 1 pi. akuma
(Bartholomae Grundr. 290, n. 1. In Bh. 1. 1. 90 Jackson records
that akuma "though defaced, is still legible" (JAOS, 24, 88)
against KT's [akjuma). Perf . opt. 3 sg. caxriya. Inf. cartanaiy (Fr.
Miiller's connection of the form with root car, go, is very im-
probable, since the Elam. renders by the same verb, hutta, which
elsewhere translates the Persian kar). Mid. pret. 3 pi. akmiava"ta,
,akunavaya"ta (Bartholomae, BB, 12, 68, for akunavyata of ed. ; cf .
KZ, 39, 153). Aor. 3 sg. akuta (Skt. akrta). Pass. pret. 3 pi.
akariya"ta (Bartholomae) where KT record the old reading asari-
yata. In Vdt. Stud. 1, 23, I adopted Bartholomae's conjecture
because l)a small horizontal wedge is all that diflterentiates s and
k, and 2)Jackson regards k as quite certain (JAOS, 24, 89).
Weissbach, writing at about the same date, likewise is ,of this
opinion, since the Elam. word (pela) renders Persian kar of the
6
82 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
phrase, uzmayapatiy — kar — , in Bh. 2. 76, 91; 3. 53. Both the Elam.
((m)u sera) and Bab. (anaku teme altakan) versions of the passage
point to an imperative, I decreed, saying, let them, etc. ; but there
is probably not an exact correspondence here, since Ave have no
evidence of a final m in the word. Part. nom. n. kartam (karta is
written in the loose syntax of Art. Pers. a, b, 3, 4). Av. kar
(Turfan MSS. qerd, qar, New Pers. kardan, Gil. kudan), Skt. kr.
kara, m. l)the j)eople. '2)army. Nom. sg. kara. Ace. sg.
karam. Gen. sg. karahya (in addition to its recorded occurrences
[kjarahya is to be read for udapatata of the ed. in Bh. 3. 1. 80; cf.
KT, 66). New Pers. kar-zar, hattle- field, Bartholomae, Altiran.
Wb.,465.
karka, m. name of a people, Nom. pi. karka.
karsa, m. name of a Persian weight. Nom. du. karsa. Dar.
Weight Inscr. II karsa adam darayavaus , a two Jcarsha loeight.
I am Darius, etc. Gray (J AGS, 20, 55) determines the value
of this weight (2573 grains Troy = 15.5 Ind. karsas; one Persian
karsa = 7.75 Ind. karsa. Gray's 7.25 Ind. karsa is certainly a^
'Druckfehler'). Skt. karsa (s. v. karsa in PWb). Cf. Weissbach,
ZDMG, 61, 402, "2 karsa (bez. 2 kursam, i mana)."
kuganaka (Elam. kukkannakan; Bab. ku-gu-na-ak-ka), f. name of a
Persian (according to Elam. version) town. Nom. sg. kuganaka,
Bh. 2. 3. kuganaka na[ma vardanam parsaiy].
ku"duru (anaptyxis for ku^'dru, Bartholomae, Grundr. 300, 6.
Elam. kuntarrus; Bab. ku-un-du-ur), m. name of a Median town.
kuru (Elam. kuras; Bab. ku-ra-as; Gr. KCpos), m. Cyrus. Nom.
sf. kurus. I fail to see any Aalid reason why the small inscrip-
tion of Murghab, adam kurus xsayaSiya haxamanisiya, should not be
assigned to the reign of Cyrus the Great; cf. Herzfeld, Pasar-
gada, Klio, Beitr. z. alt. Gesch., 8, 1908; Hoffmann-Kutschke,
Phil. Nov. 1907; Foy, ZDMG, 54, 361. Many scholars influ-
enced by the fact that the documents of Cyrus are written in
Babylonian, and by Weissbach's interpretation of a doubtful
passage in the Elam. Bh. L. that Darius was the first to inscribe
AXCIEKT PERSIAN LEXICON 83
in the Persian tongue (zaumin ""uramaSta-na (m)u (det)tuppime taie-
ikkl hutta arriya-ma) put this in the time of Cyrus the Younger.
Sayce goes to the extreme of assigning it to a Persian satrap,
the brother of Xerxes, called Achaemenes by Ktesias. For the
place of Cyrus in Achaemenidan dynasty, see Cyrus Cylinder,
20 (where Teispes is recorded as the common ancestor with Da-
rius line; cf. Tolman and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires of East,
73 ff.). Nom. sg. kurus, Cyrus Inscr. Gen. sg. kuraus, Bh. 1. 10.
ka"bujiya nama kuraus puS'a, Camii/ses hy na'ne the son of Cyrus.
Bh. 1. 11. adam bardiya amiy hya kuraus pu^'a, I am Smerdis the son
of Cyrus., et passim.
kusiya, m. name of a people. Nom. pi. kusiya, Dar. NRa. 3.
X
xarsadasya? Of the fifth character only the two perpendicu-
lar wedges are visible, which can represent i as well as d. Justi
taking signs in order 15678234: reads xisyarsa, Bab. form of name
of Xerxes. Seal Inscr. e. m xarsadasya. Cf. M6nant, Archives
des missions scientifiques, 3, 418; Justi, Iran. Namenbuch, 173;
IE, 17, Anz. 112; Foy, KZ, 37, 566; Bartholomae, Zum Altiran.
Wb. , 163. See Xsayarsan.
XS see xSayaftya.
xsaftrita (Elam. sattarrlta; Bab. ha-sa-at-ri-it-ti), m. name assumed
by Phraortes, the Median pretender. Nom. sg. xsafcta. Cf.
Tolman and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires of East, 69.
xsa^'a, n. lordship., kingdom. Nom. ace. sg. xsaS'am. Av.
xSa^ra (New Pers. salir), Skt. ksatra, fr. xsi (q. v.). I would sup-
ply [utamaiy xsa^'am] for [haca gasta] of WB in Al't. Ham. 1. 6.
See Tolman, PAPA, 36, 33.
xsa^''apavan, m. satrap. Nom. sg. xsa^^'apava. xsa^^'a (q. v.) -f
pavan, fr. pa (q. v.). Cf. Lenschau, Leipz. Stud. 12, 137.
xsap, f. night. Gen. sg. ? xsapa (cf. Skt. ksapas usras, night
and day, RV. 6. 52, 15; 7, 15, 8), against the view which now gen-
84 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
erally regards xsapa as ace. sg. after the analogy of the following
neutr. rauca. Bh. 1. 7. xsapava raucapativa, either iy night or day.
YAv. xsap (New Pers. sab, Bal. sap, Geiger, SB, 3, Afy. spa,
Kurd, sav, Oss. axsav), Skt. ksap. It might be added that Bar-
tholomae (Grundr. 219) formerly regarded the form as instr. sg.
comparing Skt. ksapa, but has now abandoned this view in favor
of the ace. sg.; cf. Altiran. "Wb., 547; Delbrftck, Vgl. Syntax,
1, 124; 3, 105.
xsaya^iya (written as ideogram in Dar. Pers. b, c; Sus. a; Sz.
b, c; Seal Inscr. ; Xerx. Pers. ca, eb; Vase Inscr. ; Art. Sus. a,
b; Hamadan; Vase Inscr.), m. king. Nom. sg. xsayaftya. Ace.
sg. xsayaftyam. Gen. Sg. xsayaftyahya. For gen. Sg. xsayaftya in
Art. Pers. a, b, 2. Nom. pi. xsayaftya. Gen. pi. xsayaftyanam
(written xsaya^iyanam in Art. Pers. a, b, 2; and xsayaftyana in Art.
Sus. b, which blunder of the stone-cutter I was able to attest by
an examination of the original which I made in 1895). The
royal title xsayaftya xsayaftyanam (New Pers. sahansah for sahansah),
kinff of I'i/ir/s, in Dar. Pers. a. and Xerx. Pers.'e. was the first
expression translated, but not then transliterated, from the cu-
neiform. This was done by Grotefend who later read in part
the two inscriptions; (l}Darius, the great king, king of kings +
+ + + son of Hystaspes. {^Xerxes, the great king, king of kings
+ + + + son of Darius, the king. See the interesting account in
Eogers, History of Babylonia and Assyria, Vol. I, 1-84. Bar-
tholomae (Altiran. Wb.) recognizes a survival of the adjectival
meaning in Bh. 1. 3. hya amaxam tauma xsaya[ftya a]ha, i. e. our
family was royal rather than our family were kings. For at-
tributive gen. in the oft-recurring phraseology, ef. Delbriick,
Vgl. Syntax, 3, 102. Phi. New Pers. sah; fr. xsi (q. v.).
xsayarsan (Elam. kserssa; Bab. hi-si-'-ar-si, Gr. Uip^tji), m. Xerxes.
Nom. sg. xsayarsa. Acc. Sg. xsayarsam (Bartholomae, Grundr. 213,
2). Gen. sg. xsayarsahya (Hamadan. "The common xsayarsahya
instead of xsayarcahya must be read in 1. 3. That the correct
spelling appears here as in the inscriptions of Xerxes at Perse-
polis, Elvend, and Van, is shown by the unmistakable occur-
rence of — §ahya at the beginning of 1. 4." Tolman, Reexami-
nation of the Inscription of Art. II on Moldings of Columns
from Ecbatana, PAPA, 36^ 32.) In Art. Sus. a, written xsayar-
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 85
cahya. For gen. sg. xsayarSa, in Art. Pers. a, b. 2. Justi, Iran'.-
Namenbuch (cf. IF, 17, Anz. Ill) would identify xargaaasya(q.v.).
Seal Inscr. e, with xsayarSa. *xsaya, Jdng, Av. xsaya, Skt. ksaya +
*arsan, man, YAv. arSan, Skt. rsabha, Gr. apa-qv.
xsi (Pres. xsaya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to rule. Av. xsi
(New Pers. sayad), Skt. ksi.
with prefix patiy, hold lordship over. Mid. pret. 1 sg.
patiyaxsayaiy, Dar. NEa. 3. adamsam patiyaxsayaly. This reading
is clearly shown in Stolze's photograph, Pers. II, 109 (cf. Foy,
KZ, 86, 49), thus setting aside patiyaxsaiy of ed. and all former
theories connecting it with axs, see.
■ with prefix upariy(?), rule. Mid. pret. 1 sg. upariy[axsayaiy],
a bold supplement which I suggested (Vdt. Stud. 1, 33) in Bh.
4. 1. 65, upariy arstam upariy[axsayaiy] naiy, with rectitude [T ruled],
as corresponding to Elam. sutur ukku hupa git, I ruled in accord-
amce with the ordinances; Bab. ina di-na-a-tu a-si-ig-gu, in accordance
with the laws I governed. Does the supplement answer in any-
way to the lithograph of Rawlinson, who on the weathered sur-
face of the rock may have confounded the signs for y'Hy^n" with
those for y" + + fh*? KT do not remark on the space in the la-
cuna, but Jackson says: "It looks like a long word ending in
h''iy." Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 729) favors the old reading
upariy [ayam].
xsna, to hnow. Inchoative pres. sub]'. 2 sg. xsnasahy. Dar.
NEa. 4, xsnas[ah(i)dis]. 3. sg. xsnasatiy. Av. xsna (Turfan MSS.
'isnftsed. New Pers. sinasad), Skt. jSa.
G
gai^a, f . personal property. KT translate Persian and Elam.
herds. The Bab. word is wanting. Darmesteter, les fermes;
Euga,rli, le campagne; WB, die Herden, Bartholomae, fahrende
Mahe; justi (IF, 17, Anz. 108), Gehofte. Ace. sg. gai^am, Bh,
1. 14. Av. gaefe, life, subsistence, world (New Pers. gehan,
world), fr. ji, live, Skt. ji-va-ti. For meaning (as well as ety-
mology) cf . /8t-os, life, Ivoelihood (yStWos) ; cf . Tolman, Vdt. Stud.
1,13.
8G ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
gaubruva (Elam. gauparma; Bab. gu-ba-m-'; Gr. rm/J/Dwag), m. Go-
h'yas, ally of Darius against the pretender Gaumata. Kom. sg.
gaubruva. According to Justi (IF, 17, Anz. Ill) *gau, cattle +
'••"barava, Skt. bharu, lord, Hinder hesitzend. Otherwise Foy,
ZDMG, 54, 360. Cf. Tolman and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires
of East, 87, n. 4.
gaumata (Elam. gaumatta; Bab. gu-ma-a-tu), m. the JNIedian pre-
tender who assumed the name of Smerdis. Nom. sg. gaumata.
Ace. sg. gaumatam. The popular version, followed by Hdt. HI,
61-64, which designated the conspirator by the name " Smerdis"
was doubtless based on a vatioinium post eventum showing an
ambiguity in the oracular vision as well as a personal negligence
in Cambyses' failure to fathom its true meaning. Cf. Tolman
and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires of East, 86-88; Noldeke, Auf-
satze z. pers. Gesch. 30; Miiller, Ztschr. f. Assyriologie, 9, 112.
gausa, m. ear. Ace. du. gausa. YAv. gaosa (New Pers. gos,
Oss. yos, Kurd, guh), Skt. ghosa, sound; fr. gus, hea/r.
gaBn, m. l)place. 2)throne. Ace. sg. ga^um. Dar. NKa. 4.
[tya]i[y mana] ga^um bara°tiy, 'ioho hear my throne. Loc. sg, (with
postpos a), ga^ava, Bh. 1. 14. adamsim gaSava avastayam, I Settled it
in its place. KT's ga^va should be read ga^ava; cf. Bartholomae,
BB, 13, 69; KZ, 30, 540. Av. gatu (Turfan MSS. gah, New
Pers. gah, Afy.yal'ai), Skt. gatu.
ga'dara (Bab. pa-ar-u-pa-ra-e-sa-an-na), m. name of a region. Nom.
sg. ga"dara.
ga'^dutava (thus read according to KT in place of Justi's emen-
dation ga°dumava. Elam. kantuma + + +), m. name of a district in
Arachosia. Nom. sg. ga°dutava, Bh. 3. .11. Hoffmann-Kutschke
writes me (May 17, 1908) that he still favors ga^dumava on the
ground of a possible error in KT's record; " ga°dumava nach elam.
kantuma-[ma] selbst verstandlich." Justi's etymology (ZDMG,
51, 240) connecting ga'^dumava with YAv. gantuma, i/'//ea#, is possi-
ble only on the supposition of a local change of the surd to so-
nant after the nasal; cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 518.
gam (Pres. jam-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 122), to go. Av. gam
(Turfan MSB. pra-gam6d. New Pers. amadan), Skt. gam.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 8T
with prefix a, come. Pres. opt. 3 sg. ajamiya (= Skt.
gamyat, Wackernagel, Ai. Gram. 8; I. E. gmm-ie-t).
with prefix para, go forth. Part. nom. sg. f. paragmata.
with prefix ham, come together., assemhle. Part. nom. pi.
111. lia"gmata. KT have followed WB's hagamata (even in their ex-
ception ha"gmata in Bh. 3. 11). In all places the word is better
read ha"gmata; cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 511.
garmapada, (Elam. karmapattas), m. name of a Persian month.
KT fa\or the identification of Garmapada with Tammuz (June-
July); July- Aug. (Justi); March-Apr. (Oppert). See s. v. mah.
Gen. sg. garmapadahya (in place of garmapadahya of ed.). *garma,
heat., Skt. gharma, Av. garama, warm (New Pers. garm, Oas. yarm)
-f- *pada, step., station, Skt. pada, YAv. paSa (New Pers. pai); fr.
*pad, go., YAv. pad, Skt. pad. For date of Gaumata's assumption
of royal power see s. v. daxi.
gasta, adj. repugnant, adverse. Nom. sg. f. gasta, Dar. NRa.
6. hauvtaiy gasta ma fedaya, may it (i. e., the law of Ahura Mazda)
■not seem, to tlhee repugnant. New Pers. gast. Thumb (Tolman,
OP. Inscr. 117, n 3) returned to Kern's interpretation (ZDMG,
23, 222) respecting gasta as connected with Skt. gad, ,speah, and
the hya of the preceding phrase as the opt. 3 sg. of ah, translat-
ing; Lass dir die lehre des Auramazda gesagt sein. That this
view is incorrect is shown by the Elam. visnika (Weissbach) and
the Bab. bi-i-si, both of which signify evil, hostile; cf . Hiibsch-
mann; er soil dir nicht iibel erschelnen.
gud, to conceal. YAv. guz, Skt. guh.
with prefix apa, hide away, conceal. Caus. pres. subj. 2
sg. apagaudayahy. Pret. 2 Sg. (Injuncti^•e) apagaudaya, Bh. 4. 10.
avafe sa + + + + adiy ma apagaudaya, thus + + + + conceal thou not.
gub (Pres. gauba-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to speah. Mid.
l)to call one^s self, take the name of. '2)to declare allegiance to.
Mid. indie, pres. 3. sg. gaubataiy, Bh. 3. 10. karam hya darayavahaus
xsayaftyahya gaubataiy, the army which declares allegiance to Da-
rius the Tcing. Pret. 3 sg. agaubata, Bh. 3, 10. hauv vahyazdata hya
88 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
bardiya agaubata (written agaur^ta by stone-cutter's blunder; cf. KT,
51), that Yahyazdata who has assumed the name of Smerdls.
3 pi. [aga]u[ba°]ta, Bh. 2. 16. Subj. pres. 3 sg. gaubataiy. Middle
Pers. gowet, New Pers. goyad; cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 4:82.
grab (Pres. garb-a-ya-, Skt. grbh-a-ya-; cf. Kretschmer, KZ, 31,
4:03), to seize. Act. pret. 1 sg. agarbayam. 3 sg. agarbaya. 3 pi.
.agarbaya" Mid. pret. 3 Sg. agarbayata.
with prefix a, seize. Part. pass. nom. sg. m. agarbita
(so Bartholomae, WZKM, 22, 65, who compares Skt. agrbhita),
thus read for agarbayata of ed. in Bh. 2. 1. 73, fravartis agarbita
anayata, Phraortes seised was Jed. KT's view that we have here
the passive form, 8 sg. , is not likely. Av. grab, Skt. grabh.
C
ca, end. conj. and. Av. ca (Middle Pers. ca), Skt. ca.
[Word-divider + casma, eye. Jackson's reading for uc^s^m"
in Bh. 2. 13, 14].
ci°cixri (Elam. zinzakriS; Bab. si-in-sa-ah-ri-is), m. name of the
father of Martiya. Gen. sg. ci"cixrais.
cita, adv. so long, Bh. 2. 9, 11; with yata, nntil. "Wrongly
supplied in the ed. in Bh. 2. 1. 28; cf. KT, 26. ci (cf. ka) + ta
(cf. -Ta in 'eVetTa).
ci^'a, n. seed, lineage; second member of the compound in
ariya c[i]^''a, of Aryati lineage; see ariya. Av. ci^ra (New Pers.
cihr), Skt. citra.
ci0''a"taxina (Elam. zissantakma; Bab. si-it-ra-an-tah-ma), m. name
of a Sagartian reljel. Nom. sg. ci^^a'^taxma. Instr. sg. ci^^'a^tax-
ma. dO'^a. (q. v.) + *taxma, irai'r, Av. taxma (New Pers. tahm)
ciy, cncl. pel. l)makes indefinite the interr. pron., e. g., kasciy,
avy one, cisciy, anything; 2)emphasizes slightly the word to which
it is joined, e. g., Bh. 1. 14. ya^a [■pa.i]uya.m[ci]y, just as it was before.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 89
Cf . Delbrlick, Vgl. Syntax, 3, 49. YAv. cit, GAv. cit (Middle
Pers. ci, New Pers. cih, Oss. ci, Kurd, ci), Skt. cit; Ace. n. of ka
with palatalization.
ciyakara, adj. kow many, restricted in number. Nom. sg, n.
ciyakaram, Dar. NRa. 4. Cf. Foy, KZ, 35, 47; Bartholomae,
Altiran. Wb., 597. *ciya (cf. ka), Skt. kiyant + *kara, fr. kar (q.
v.). ciya" of ed. is better read ciya- (for ciyat).
^ajgapaj^ rcad cispi (Elam. zispis; Bab. si-is-pi-is) or caispi (Gr.
TetWiys), m. Teispes, common ancestor of Cyrus (Cyrus Cylin-
der, 20) and Darius (Bh. 1. 2; Bh. a). Cf. Prdsek, Forsch. z.
Gesch. d. Altert. 3, 24, vs. the extreme view of Winclder, Or.
Litt. Ztg. 1898, 43; Tolman and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires
of East, 73-78. Nom. sg. ciSpis, Bh. a (omitted in Bh. 1. 2; KT
record that there is room for this restoration on the eroded sur-
face of the rock). Gen. sg. cispais, Bh. 1. 2.
jatar (nom. ag.), m. smiter, slayer. Nom. sg. jata, Bh. 4.
11. auramazdatay jata biya, may Ahura Mazda he thy slayer, i. e.
may he slay thee; cf. the so-called Skt. Periphrastic Future,
Whitney, Skt. Gram. 942-4. jata can also be read ja°ta; cf.
Bartholomae, IF, 4. 128. For this curse upon the would-be
destroyer of the royal memorial, note phraseology of Inscr. of
Asur-nasir-pal (Schrader, Keilinschriftliche Bibliothek, Vol. I.
122), asur bilu rabu-u ilu as-su-ru-u bil si-ma-a-ti s[i-m]a-ti-su li-ru-ur
ip-si-ti-su lu-na[k-ki]-ir, Ashur the great Lord, the Assyrian God,
Lord of Fate, may he curse the fate of him {who destroys this
momiment) and annihilate his worhs. Cf. Bang, Melanges de
Harlez, ll; Tolman, PAPA, 33, 70. YAv. jantar (Middle Pers.
zatar), Skt. hantar; fr. jan (q. v.).
jad (Pres. jadiya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 147) to pray. Pres.
1 sg. jadiyamiy, Dar. NRa. 5. aita adam auramazdam jadiyamiy, this I
leg of Ahura Mazda. Dar. Pers. d. 3. yanam (Jackson, JAOS,
27, 191) jadiyamiy (The m of jadiyamiy, though hardly legible in
Stolze's photograph, is attested by Jackson as "quite clear on
91' AXCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
the stone " and should now be removed from brackets in the ed.).
TAv. jad (Turfan MSS. nlzay(and).
jan (Pres. jan-, ja-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 122), io smite, day.
Indie, pret. 1 Sg. ajanam, Bh. 4. 2. adamlim ajanam, I waged these
(hattles); wrongly KT, I overthrew nine lungs. 3 sg. aja". In-
junctive, 2 pi. jH^a (jata or ja"^ta). Pres. impv. 2 sg. jadiy. Av.
jan (New Pers. zanad, Kurd, zanin), Skt. han.
with prefix ava, sinite dovvi, slay. Part. nom. sg. avajata.
This reading recorded by KT in Bh. 1. 1. 32, sets aside Bartholo-
mae's conjecture avajata and confirms Rawlinson's lithograph
av^ietter j^t". KT's Cuneiform text shows no space between v'"' and
j"; cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 10.
with prefix ava + a, smite dmon, destroy. Indie, pret. 1
sg. avajanam. 3 Sg. avaja''. 3 pi. avajana" (with thematic vowel;
of. Skt. ahanan, Whitney, RVf. 202). Opt. 3 sg. avajaniya; cf.
Wackernagel, Ai. Gram. 8.
with prefix patiy, tvage (battle) against, fight. Mid. pret.
3 sg. patiyajata, Dar. NEa. 4.
■ with prefix fra, cut off. Pret. 1 sg. frajanam.
ji (I. E. gei-, Pres. ji-va-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 141; cf. Skt.
ji-va-ti), to live. Subj. 2 sg. jiva, Bh. 4. 10. dargam jiva, mayest
thoih live long. Av. jivaiti (New Pers. zinda, Kurd, zin), Skt. jivati.
jiyamna (thus read for jiyamana of KT; cf. Weissbach, ZD]\IG,
61, 726. KT's record supersedes the various emendations of
iyamanam of ed.) adj. loaning, growing old, as subs, compldion.,
end. Ace. sg. jiyamnam, Bh. 2, 1. 62. ^uravaharahya mahya jiyam-
nam patiy, at end of the m,onth Thuravaharaj or as Bartholomae
(WZKM, 22, 9) puts it, mensem scnescentem versus. Elam. ver-
sion renders, at the end of the month Turmar; Bab. on the tliir-
tieth day of the month lyynr. Cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 20.
YAv. jyamna, fr. jya, groiv ipeal^.
jiva, adj. living. Gen. sg. jivahya. Av. jva, Skt. jiva; fr. ji
(q. v.).
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 91
T
taiy (end. I. E. t(u)ei, t(u)oi, Bartholomae, Stud. 1. 114). See
tuvam.
tauma, f. fainily. Nom. sg. tauma. Gen. sg. taumaya. ,Foy
(KZ, 35, 6) connects the word with YAv. taoxman (New Pers.
tuxm), Skt. tokman, but such etymology becomes somewhat un-
certain when we remark the retention of Ir. x in -taxma (ci^'a^tax-
ma), Av. taxma (New Pers. tahm). Jackson's identification
(JAOS, 20, 57) of the festival of Xerxes' birthday (Hdt. 9. 110;
IleptricrTt ftky rvKrd, Kara Se tyjv '^Xki^voyv ykSxrcrav riXcov) with Iranian
root tuk holds good for YAv. taoxman, but we are not certain of
the comparison which he gives with Persian tauma. It would be
easy for the Greeks, of course, to confound the foreign word
with TVKTo. and render it by tc'Xeov.
[tauman (Foy, KZ, 35, 47; cf. Bang, ZDMG, 43, 533; Reich-
elt, KZ, 39, 74; Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 613) n. jxywer,
might. Nom. sg. tauma, Bh. 4. 16, 17; 5. 3, 6, yavatamna ahatiy, as
long as will he possible. Foy renders the corresponding Elam.
word, -paXta., possibility; cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1. 34. Hoffmann-
Kutschke writes me: "Es kann doch nicht bedeuten, clu bewahre,
so lange deine Familie lebt; man kann doch nur schtitzen, so
lange man selbst lebt. tJbrigens steht in Elamischen nicht das
Ideogramm GUL, Familie.'''' *tu, be strong, Av. tu, Skt. tu.]
takabara, adj. a word of doubtful meaning and characterizing
the lonians in Dar. NRa. 3. Nom. pi. m. takabara. "\YB retain
the old interpretation, welclie geflochtenes Ilaar tragen . Cf . Foy,
KZ, 35, 63 and later KZ, 37, 545. Bartholomae rejects on phil-
ological grounds the attempted connection with Arm. t'agavor,
Krone tragend. Could the word signify sioift- (YAv. tak, hasten.,
Skt. tak) riding or sea-faring (YAv. taka, water-course + bara,
cf . asabari) ?
taxmaspada (Elam. takmaspata), m. name of one of the com-
manders of Darius. Nom. sg. taxmaspada. taxma, bra/ve, Av.
taxma (New Pers. tahm) + *spada, army, GAv. spada, YAv. spaSa
(New Pers. sipah, Horn, NS, 42, 3).
92 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
taxs (Pres. taxsa-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to be active^
Foy regards the root as a Jcompromisshildimg between *tas (Skt.
tats, Av. tas in tasan) and *tvaxs (Skt. tvaks, Av. ^waxs).
with prefix ham, worh together, cooperate, worh. Pret. 1
Sg. hamataxsaiy. 3 sg. hamataxsata. 3 pi. hamataxsa"ta.
tacara, palace. Ace. sg. tacaram, Dar. Pers. a. New Pers. tazar.-
Cf. Horn, NS, 31, 2; Foy, KZ, 37, 546.
tar, to cross over. Av. tar, Skt. tr.
with prefix fra, depart from, abandon. The old reading
of Rawlinson fratarta, Bh. 3. 6, part. nom. sg. is confirmed by
KT. Foy (KZ, 35, 43) first suggested frarixta, but later (KZ, 37,
556) returns to the reading fratarta; cf. HofEmann-Kutschke, Or.
Litt. Ztg. Nov. 1905; Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 24.
with prefix viy, pres. taraya- (Bartholomae, Grundr. 145),
put across, cross. Pret. 1 sg. viyatarayam (confirmed by KT),
Bh. 5. 4. 1 pi. viyatarayama (confirmed by KT's cuneiform
text; KT's transliteration has the old reading viyatarayama which
Bartholomae, Grundr. 109, regarded as pret. with pres. ending;
cf. Skt. apacyamas), Bh. 1. 18.
taradraya, adv. across the sea. *tara, beyond, YAv. taro (New
Pers. tar), Skt. tiras + drayah (q. v.).
tarava (Bab. ta-ar-ma-'), f. name of a Persian town. Nom. sg.
tarava (confirmed by KT); cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 515.
tarsa-, inchoative stem (Ir. trs'-a- for trs-sx'-a-, Bartholomae,
Grundr. 135), to fear; with haca followed by instr. orabl. Pres.
3 sg. tarsatiy, Dar. Pers. d. 2. haca aniyana naiy tarsatiy, it fears no
enemy. Pret. 1 sg. (Injunctive) tarsam, Dar. Pers. e. 3. haca
aniyana ma [tajrsam, no foe vnll I fear, 3 sg. atarsa, Bh. 1. 13.
karasim haca darsma" (Bartholomae) atarsa karam vasiy avajaniya hya
paranam bardiyam adana, the people feared his tyranny; {they feared)
he would slay in great numbers the people who had formerly
known Smerdis. Bartholomae is doubtless right in regarding
the opt. clause as the object of atarsa; cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1,
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 93
11. Otherwise Foy, KZ, 37, 548. Gray, AJP, 21, 16, renders,
the people were ridghtily afraid of him. '"''lie would he killing
at loill tlie people y KT entirely miss the force of the opt. in
their translation, the people feared liim exceedingly, {for) he slew
■iiiuiiy. 3 pi. atarsa". YAv. tarasaiti (Turfan MSS. tersftd, Oss.
t'arsun, Kurd, tirsin, New Pers. tarsidan), Skt. trasati, Gr. rpkuv (for
Tp4ar-uv; cf. L. Meyer, Gr. Etym. 809).
tigra (Elam. tikra), m. name of a fortress in Armenia. Nom.
Sg. tigra.
[tigra, a supplement of Foy in.Bh. 5. 1. 22, [xaudajm tigram bara°-
tay", igegen die S<tl:e)i welcJic') den. Helnwpitz tragen (cf . tigraxauda)
in place of + + tigram baratya of ed. and KT. Hoffmann-Kutschke
writes me: "Es wohnen doch keine Saken am Tigris." KT's cu-
neiform text records tigram; their transliteration, tigram. Which
is the reading on the stone? Foy's emendation is impossible
since KT attest the certainty of the preceding sakam.]
tigra (Elam. tikra; Bab. di-ig-lat), f. Tigris. Ace. sg. tigram.
Kossowicz's quotation from Eust. ad Dionys. perieg. 5, 984,
Tt'ypis Ta.-)(y'i (us j3i\os. M^Soi yap Tlypiv KaXova-i, to TO^EV;u,a, showS Only
a popular association of the word with YAv. tiyri, arrow (New
Pers. tir), but it is of no etymological value. Cf . Pltibschmann,
IF, 16, 421. Note Oijp Trora/xos in Theophanes, 52, 23 (cf. New
Pers. tir) "mit volksetymologischer Umanderung," Horn, NS,
19, 6.
tigraxauda, adj. with pointed cap, epithet of Scythians. Nom.
pi. tigraxauda. Cf. Hdt. 7. 64, SaKat 8e ol 'SiKvdai irepl p,kv TTjcri Kc4>a-
Xrj(n Kvpl3aa-Lai es o^v a.-n-qyp.iva^ opda's et^ov TreTTTjyvtas. So the ninth
standing figure opposite Darius on the Behistan rock (over which
is written iyam sku"xa hya saka, this is Skunkha the Scythian) is
represented wearing this national head-dress. *tigra, pointed,
YAv. tiyra (New Pers. tez) -)- xauda-, haty YAv. xaoSa- (Oss. xoda).
^ ^ ^ t^'n^uv^fm^, the reading of KT in Bh. 4. 1. 65 who re-
mark; " Space for division sign and two characters. It is pos-
sible that the break may be restored mam stunuvatam, those that
jrraise me.'" Jackson recorded man^uvHV (q. v.). Weissbach
(ZDMG, 61, 729) suggests a derivation from tanu, ^veah, and
94 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
translates, dem airmen. The Bab. apparently renders the word
by mus-ki-nu. See s. V. sakaurim and man"uv''t''m^.
tuvam (I. E. tu, tu; of. Wackernagel, Das Dehnungsg. 5), pron.
2 pers. ihuu. Nom. sg. tuvam. Ace. sg. ^uvam. Gen. sg. taiy
(end., written tay in Bh. 4. 11). Skt. tvam, GAv. tv5m, YAv.
turn (Xew Pers. tu).
tya (I. E. tio, tia. Ir. tia which should become according to
phonetic laws *(9ia, Pers. *siya, is probably due to the analogy of
the demon, ta; Bartholomae, Grundr. 416, n.), originally a
demon, pron., but generally used as a relative. Cf. hya. l)The
demon, meaning is seen in the following: '')hada kara iiipadi[y]
t[ya]iy asiyava, he went in pursuit of them tcith his army, Bh. 3.
12. This reading is confirmed by KT, thus making impossible
Bartholomae's conjecture avaiy (Stud. 2. 68); cf. Tolman, Vdt.
Stud. 1. 26. ^)introducing a phrase characterizing the preceding
noun like the Gr. article (Tolman, OP. Inscr. 42): paftm tyam
rastam ma avarada, depart not from the true vxiy, Dar. NRa. 6;
xsa^'am tya babirauv, the royal power at SaiyJon, Bh. 1. 16; karam
tyam madam, tJmt Median army, Bh. 2. 6. etc. Cf . Delbrtick, Vgl.
Syntax, 3, 313. 2)Rel. pron. who, which. Ace. sg. m. tyam.
Ace. sg. f. tyam. Acc. sg. n. tya. Nom. ace. pi. m. tyaiy (Bar-
tholomae, Grundr. 240). Nom. acc. pi. f. tya. Nom. acc. pi. n.
tya (written on rock tyana), Bh. 1. 8. ima dahyava tya mana data,
apariyaya", these lands respected my laws; cf. Bartholomae, Alti-
ran. Wb. 659; Foy, KZ, 37, 501. The reading of the stone
tyana (confirmed by KT) was regarded as dittography by Benfey
(Pers. Keilinschr. 9) as early as the year 184T, who remarked:
"Es ist aber wohl Fehler des Steinmetz, welcher zuerst auf das-
gleich folgende mana abirrte." Gen. pi. m. tyaisam. For. gen.
pi. f. tyaisam, Dar. Pers. e. dahyunam tyaisam parunam. Skt. tya,
Turfan jNISS. 'i. Note article on Persian relative in Delbrtick,
Vgl. Syntax, ?>, 311.
tya (ace. sg. n. to tya), conj. l)that. Bh. 1. 10. azda abava tya
bardiya avajata (sic), it nyis {not) Jinoicn that Snierdis v:as murdered.
2)iecause. Bh. 4. 4. drauga di[s hami^'iyja akimaus tya imaiy karam
adurujiyasa", Deceit made them rehellioux, because those deceived
the people. Cf. Delbrtick, Vgl. Syntax, 3, 327.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 95
®
^aigarci (Elam. saikurrizis; Bab. simanu), m. name of a Persian
month. The Bab. indicates agreement with Si van (third month)
i. e. May-June; April-May (Justi); May-June (Oppert). See
S. V. mah. Gen. sg. fegarcais.
6»"k"t''a, written ^Vfrn" in Bh. 3. 1. The generally accepted
opinion, until the reading ^Vfrn" was attested, regarded ^akata
as loc. sg. in completed course. In Vdt. Stud. 1. 23, I shared
the view of KT that ^"k'fm" was simply a stone-cutter's blunder.
Bartholomae writes me concerning this: "Das dakatam 'a blun-
der' sei flir 'ta glaube ich nicht. Bh. 3. 1, ist die einzige Stelle
da es sich um nur einen Tag des Monats handelt." The same
scholar (WZKM, 22, 90) now takes ^akata (nom. pi.) and ^akatam
(n. sg.) as adjectival predicates either of a part. fut. pass, or
part. pres. act. ^aka^ta, ^aka°tam. In every passage save Bh. 3. 1,
the instr. pi. is used as subject of the following aha", a use of
the case occasional in YAv. (Schmidt, Pluralbld. 98; Jackson,
Av. Gr. 229; Bartholomae, AF, 2, lOi; Caland, GGA, 401 for
year 1893; Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1. 10). Bh. 1. 18. bagayadais
mahya 10 raucabis ^akata aha", in the month of Bdgayadi ten days
were coming to tlie end; et passim. In Bh. 3. 1, we appear to
have a nom. sg. as subject of aha (cf. Gray, AJP, 21, 10); garma-
padahya mahya 1 rauca ^akatam aha, in the mxmth of Garmapada one
day was completing its course, *Oak, YAv. sak, (of time) to pass
(to completion).
^atagu (Elam. sattakus; Bab. sa-at-ta-gu-u), Sattagydia. Nom.
sg. ^atagus. *6ata, hundred, YAv. sata (New Pers. , Kurd, sad, Oss.
sada), Skt. cata -f *gau, cattle, Av. gau (New Pers. gav, Kas. g5,
Kurd, ga), Skt. gau. Cf. Fick, BB, 41, 343.
OeJ'd (Pres. ^adaya, a for I. E. n; Bartholomae, Grundr. 145), to
seem. Pres. subj. 3 sg. ^adaya? (Bartholomae, ZDMG, 46, 295),
Bh. 4. 8. avahya paruv ^a[daya], should seem to him m.uch. KT
read fe[dutiy] remarking that the restoration is not certain,
^ad" + +, however, seems certain in Jackson's examination. Pret.
3 sg. (Injunctive) fedaya, Dar. NRa. 6. hauvtaiy gasta ma fedaya,
m,ay it not seem repugnant to thee, fedayamiy is read in Dar. Sus.
a. by WB, where I have suggested y(?)adayamaiy. YAv. sand
(Middle Pers. sahet, Turfan MSS. htinisandeft), Skt. chand.
96 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
6adei6a., uncertain word in Seal Inscr. b. hadaxaya + + + + OadaOa.
Oaid, f . year. Gen. sg. Onrdu; hamahyaya ^arda, in the same year.,
(connecting ferd with YAv. sarad, Turfan MSS. sar). The mean-
ing in the same way (YAv. sarada) was favored by the Elam.
pelM-ma without the determinative (an). The interpretation seems
now certain through Bab. ideogram MU-AN-NA, year (which
KT, however, render adverbially, alvmys; cf . sattisam, yearly., al-
ways): cf. Weissbach, ZDMG, 61, 724. In a personal letter
Weissbach several months later writes me concerning his inter-
pretation as follows: "Meine Deutung hamahyaya 6arda, in einem
und dernselben Jalire halte ich ftir absolut sicher. So sagt Da-
rius. Eine andere Frage ist nun aber, ob seine Angabe ganz
wortlioh zu verstehen sei und diese Frage muss ich verneinen.
Offenbar liegt die Sache so, dass die Emporungen alle in einem
und demselben Jahre ausgebrochen sind; aber zu ihrer Bewalti-
gung hat er einer etwas langeren Zeit bedurf t. Die Chronologie
der Bisutun-Inschrift bietet nocht jetzt gewisse Schwierigkeiten;
aber tlber einige Grundwahrheiten kann man schon jetzt nicht
mehr im Zweifel sein. Gaumata erhob sich am 14. Viyakhna
=14. Addaru des 7. Jahres des Kambyses, also am 10. Marz 522
V. Chr. Er ergriflf die Herrschaft am 9. Garmapada. Fiir mich
kann dieser Monat nur dem Nisannu gleichgesetzt. 9. Garma-
pada also = 3. April 522 v. Chr. Am 10. Bagayadis fiel Gau-
mata und Darius wurde Konig. Nun solt Gaumata 7 Monate
regiert haben, also ist der Bagayadis entweder der VII Monat
oder der VIII Monat, je nachdem man entweder von Gaumatas
Erhebung oder von seiner Ergreif ung der Herrschaft ausrechnen
will. Tertium non daftir. Folglich ist Darius — mit einer Feh-
lergi'enze von 1 Tag — entweder am 28. Sept. oder am 27. Oct.
522 Konig geworden. Die Rebellionen sind demnach alle in
dem Jahr 522//^ ausgebrochen und zum grossen Teil auch noch
in diesem Jahr niedergeschlagt worden." Ace. sg. ^ardam, Bh.
6. 1; cf. Weissbach, ZDMG, 61, 731.
0ah. (Pres. 6ah3.-> 6a-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123; 270, c, 6),
to declare, speak, say. Act. ind. pres. 3 sg. Oatiy. Pret. 1 sg.
afeham. 3 Sg. a^aha. Subj. pres. 2 sg. 6ahy (<0ahahy). Pass,
pres. 1 pi. (with act. ending, Bartholomae, Grundr. 825) 6ahya-
mahy. a^^h'y" (read a^ahya, pass. pret. 3 sg. with act. ending,
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 97
Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 1579 or a^ahy, pass. aor. 3 sg. ; cf.
Skt. cansi, Tolman, OP. Inscr. 60; Bartholomae, Grundr. 154).
Inf. ^astanaiy. Av. sah, Skt. cans. Cf. Fick, BB, 41, 343.
6uxra (Elam. tukkurra; Bab. su-uh-ra-'), m. name of the father of
Otanes. Gen. sg. ^uxrahya. Probably connected with *6uxra,
in'g/it, Av. suxra (New Pefs., Oss. surx, Afy. sur, Kurd. s6r, Socin,
3K, 31), Skt. cukra; cf. Foy, KZ, 35, 20.
^uravahara (Elam. turmar; Bab. aim), n. name of a Persian
month. The Bab. indicates agreement with lyyar (third month)
i. e. April-May. March-April (Justi); April-May (Oppert).
Gen. sg. fiuravaharahya (Bartholomae, Grundr. 412, n). *^ura, vig-
orous + *vahara, Spring time, New Pers. bahar; cf. Skt. vasara
<Hillebrandt, Ved. Myth. 1, 26).
^uvam (I. E. tue-, Av. ^wam, Skt. tvam). See tuvam.
^'i, to lean. YAv. sri, Skt. cri.
with prefix niy (Pres. ^'aray-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 128),
to restore. Pret. 1 sg. niya^'arayam, Bh. 1. 14. ayadana adam
aiya^'arayam, I restored the places of worship, ayadana is better
taken thus than with the preceding akunavam (WB, 15; Barthol-
omae, Altiran. Wb., 1638; KT, 13; Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 13).
Otherwise AJP, 21, 16; ZDMG, 54, 373. KT ignore avafe adan ■
akunavam altogether in their translation.
^"■itiya, num. ordinal, third. Ace. sg. f . ^''[itiyam] (Weissbach,
^•■itiyam), Bh. 5. 1. Acc. sg. n. (as adv.) B'ttijum, for the third
time, Bh. 2. 9. Skt. trtiya (Whitney, Skt. Gr. 243), YAv. (9ritya
(Middle Pers. sltikar).
l)da (I. E. pres. *di-d6-mi, *dl-d-mes; Persian pres. sg. dada-, Bar-
tholomae, Grundr. 126), to give. Impv. 3 sg. dadatuv, Dar.
7
08 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
Pers. d. 3. ai[taiuai]y [aujramazda dadatu[v], this let Ahura Mazda.
ijrniht me. Av. da (Turf an MSS. dlyad, New Pers. dihaS, Oss.
dadt'un, Hiibschmann, Oss. Sprache, 96), Skt. da.
2)da (I. E. pres. *dlii-dhe-mi, *dlu-dh-mes; Skt. pres. da-dha-mi, da-
dh-mas), to put., make, create. Pret. 3 sg. adada (Skt. adadhat),
Dar. Pers. d. 1. hauv darayavaiun xsaya^yam adada, he made Darius
ling. Aor. 3 sg. ada (Skt. adhat), Dar. Elvend, 1. hya imam
bumim ada, w7io created this earth. Av. da, Skt. dha.
daiy, reading of KT in Bh. 5. 1. 11. See marda.
[daus, dug?, to take pleasure in., esteem. The form on which
Bartholomae, AF, 2, 30, based the occurrence of this verb is
dausta (Bh. 4. 14) which he regarded as an s- aor. mid. 2 sg.
KT record avaiy ma dausta + + + a. In Vdt. Stud. 1, 33 I supplied
[l)iy]a (opt. 2 sg), cf. 6uvam dausta biya (Bh. 4. 1. 55). Weissbach
makes same supplement (ZDMG, 61, 729) and Bartholomae
(WZKM, 22, 88) is now inclined to abandon his former view.
The Elam. word corresponding here to the Persian is kannenti,
fut. 2 sg, while the same verb (kanesne, prec. 3 sg.) renders the
Persian dausta biya in Bh. 3. 11. 55, 75, 86; cf. Tolman, op. cit. 3.S].
daustar, m. friend. Nom. sg. dausta. With ace. ^uvam dausta
biya, may he he a friend to thee., Bh. 4. 10, et passim. New Pers.
dost; fr. *dus, to esteem., take delight in, YAv. zus, Skt. jus.
data, n. law. Nom. sg. datam. Ace. pi. data, Bh. 1. 8. tya.
mana data apariyaya", they respected my laws (written on the stone
tyana mana data. See tya). Av. data; fr. 2)da (q. v.). Cf. Turf an
MSS. dadlst.
d"? f's"?, a doubtful reading of KT in Bh. 4. 1. 72. Hoilmann-
Kutschke suggests the emendation yava tava ahy, .^o lange da
machtlg list (Phil. Nov. 3, lO.")).
datuhya (Elam. tattu[hi]ya; Bab. za-'-tu-'-a), m. name of the father
of Megabyzas. Gen. sg. [datu]hyahya. Cf. KZ, 39, 153.
dadarsi (Elam. tatarsis; Bab. da-da-ar-su), m. name of l)a Persian
satrap (xsa^'apavan) ; 2)an Armenian subject. Nom. sg. dadarsis.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 93'
The word is clearly written in Bh. 2. 1. 29 and should be removed-
from brackets in ed. ; cf . KT, 27. Ace. sg. dadarsim. Redup*
theme (intens.) of dar§ (q. v.).
dan (Pres. dana-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 132), to know. Fret.
3 sg. adana. Av. zan (Turfan MSS. danfem, New Pers. danaS),
Skt. janati. Cf. KZ, 39, 157; Wackernagel, Ai. Gram. 76.
dan (Pres. danu-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 131), tofio-n^ Pres. 3
sg. d^n'Hi + + + + (Dar. Sz. c. 3) which may be read danu[taiy], cf .
Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 683; Keller, KZ, 39, 175, or danu-
[vatiy], of. Skt. dhanvati, Whitney, Skt. Gr. 716. New Pers. dan-
idan, Skt. dhan.
dar (Caus. pres. daraya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 151), V)to hold^
'■2)hold a position, halt. Pres. 1 sg. darayamiy. Pret. 3 sg. adar-
aya. In Dar. NRa. 3, Foy (KZ, 37, 560) would restore the form
adaraya in place of adariy. s- aor. 1 Sg. adarsiy (Bartholomae,
Grundr. 156) or adarsaiy (with thematic vowel), Dar. Pers. e. 2.
Aor. (pass.) 3 sg. adariy, Bh, 2. 13, 15. Av. dar (Turfan MSS.
dared, New Pers. daraS), Skt. dhr.
with prefix ham, obtain. Mid. pret. 1 sg. hamadarayaiy,
Bh. 1. 9. yata ima xsa5''am lia[ma]darayai[y], until I ohtained this
kingdom. This reading is attested by KT, and supersedes [adjary
of ed. and the various attempts at emendation; cf . Tolman, Vdt.
Stud. 1, 9.
daraya^ta, reading of WB in Dar. NRd. , Pfeilbewahrer (isunam;
isuvam, Bartholomae). Cf. ZDMG, 50, 663; AJP, 21, 2; Foy,
ZDMG, 55, 509; Hoffmann-Kutschke, Or. Litt. Ztg. Sept.
1906 (denanam daraya^ta); Justi, dasyama (dasya -\- man).
darayavau (Elani. tariyamaus; Bab. da-ri-ia-mus; Gr. Aapetos for
*AajO£iaros, cf. Keiper, Sem. Phil., Erlangen, 1, 25:5; Aesch. Pers.
Aapetai/, 662), m. l)Darlus I. Nom. sg. darayavaus. Acc. sg.
darayavaum. Gen. Sg. darayavahaus (darayavausahya in Art. Sus. a).
For gen. sg. darayavaus (Art. Pers. a, b, 2). 2)Da/'las 11. Gen.
sg. darayavausahya (Art. Sus. a, 1; in Art. Hamadan, darayava(u)sa-
hya, Tolman, PAPA, 36, 32). For gen. sg. darayavaus (Art. Sus.
b; Art. Pers. a, b, 2). Darius I, after the death of Cambyses^
J 00 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
ascends the throne by virtue of his kinship to the royal race
(see s. r. c^is^p^i). Political tradition has colored the popular
version of Hdt. Ill, 85-7 (cf. Scholl, Die Anf ange einer politis-
chen Litteratur bei den Griechen) respecting the counsel of the
allies and the stratagem of Darius' groom. Cf . Duncker, Gesch.
d. Altert. 4:^ 388; Marquart, Philol. Suppl. 6, 588; Winckler,
Untersuchungen z. altorient. Gesch., 126; Noldeke, Aufsatze
z. pers. Gesch., 15; Tolman and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires
of East, 86. daraya-, pres. part, to dar, + *vahu, Skt. vasu, good,
as. n. sg. wealth.
dargam, adj. long. GAv. daraga, YAv. daraya (Oss. dary, Bal.
drag, Afy. larya, Geiger, SA, 2).
dars (Pres. darsnu-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 131), to dare. Pret.
3 sg. adarsnaus. Skt. dhrs.
o*
darsam, adv. mightily., much; cf. dars.
darsman, h. ioldness, tyrmmy, despotism. Abl. sg. (with haca)
darsma°, Bartholomae's conjecture for darsam of ed. in Bh. 1. 13,
karasim haca darsma" atarsa, ths people feared his tyranny; cf. Tol-
man, Vdt. Stud. 1, 11. dars (q. v.).
dasta, m. hand. Loc. sg. (with postpos. a) dastaya. Av. zasta
(New Pers. dast), Skt. hasta.
dahyni, i. province, district, land. Nom. sg. dahyaus. Ace. sg.
dahyaum (DAHyum in Ai't. Pers. a, b, 4). Loc. sg. (with postpos.
a) dahyauva. Nom. pi. dahyava. Gen. pi. dahyimam. Loc. pi. (with
postpos. a) dahyusuva. Av. dahyu (Middle Pers. deh, New Pers. dih,
town, Horn, NS, 42, 1), Skt. dasyu, used as the title of the
demons.
di, demon, pron. (most often end.), it, them. Ace. sg. f. dim,
Dar. NKa. 4. pasavadim (i. e. imam bumim) mana frabara, he gave it to
me. Ace. pi. m. dls, Bh. 4. 4. imaiy karam adurajiyasa" pasava di[s
auramazjda mana dastaya akunaus, these deceived the people; after-
wards Ahura Mazda put them (i. e. the people; cf. Elam. ver-
sion) into my hand. Ace. pi. f. dis (Bh. 4. 1. 34), m. (Bh. 4. 16,
17). YAv. di.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 101
di (Pres. didi-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 126), to see. Impv. 2 sg.
didiy (haplography for dididiy; cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb.,
725), Dar. NKa. 4. Av. di (Turfan MSS. did, New Pers. didan),
Skt. dhi.
di (Pres. dina-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 132), to inju7'e, deprive
one (ace.) of soiaetldng (ace.), take {sicc.) from one (ace.). Pret.
1 Sg. adinam, Bh. 1. 13. xsa^'amsim adam adinam, I tooh the Tcing-
do'm from Mm. 3 sg. adins. Part. ace. sg. m. ditam, Bh. 1. 13.
avam gaumatam tyam magum xSa^'am ditam caxriya, could mahe Gau-
mata the Ifagian di'prived of the lilngdoni. YAv. zi (Middle
Pers. zinitan), Skt. ji.
dida, f. stronghold. Nom. sg. dida. Ace. sg. didam. New
Pers. diz; cf . YAv. diz, heap iqy.
dipi, f . inscription. Ace. sg. dipim. Loc. sg. d[i]p[iy]a, Bh. 4.
)S. New Pers. dibir. Cf. Assyr. duppu, Elam. tuppi; Jensen, ZA,
6, 172; Foy, ZDMG, 50, 128; Pedersen, KZ, 40, 190. According
to Htising's interpretation of the Elam. (Bh. L.) Darius declares
that he made inscriptions on bricks, halat, and leather, SU.
dubala, m. name of a district in Babylonia, Nom. sg. dubala.
duraiy, adv. _/«?'. In Dar. NEa. 1. 44, duraiy for du[ra]y is clearly
to be read. With apiy written duraiy apiy, Xerx. Pers. a. 2; durai-
apiy, Dar. NRa. 2 (so Stolze's photograph, Pers. 11, 109); duray-
apiy, ibid, (so Stolze's photograph). Loc. sg. of *dura, yar, Av.
*dura (New Pers., Kurd, diir, Gab. dur), Skt. dura.
duruj (Pres. durujiya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 148), to lie, deceive.
Pret. 3 sg. adurujiya. 3 pi. (with s of sigmatic aor.) adurujiyasa",
Schmidt, KZ, 27, 326; Bartholomae, Grundr. 309, II: as an s-
aor, Fr. Mtiller, WZKM, 7, 258; Foy (KZ, 35, 30) regarded the
-sa as enel. (cf. Lat. se-) "weg," translating sie logen weg; cf.
ZDMG, 52, 597. Part. ace. n. sg. duruxtam, Bh. 4. 7. ima hasiyam
naiy duruxtam adam akuna[vam], / did this as something true not pre-
tunded. For Oppert's duruxtam in Bh. 4. 1. 43, [draujjiyahy (see
draujiya) is better to be supplied, adurujiya, occurring in Bh. Inscr.
over twenty times, clearly represents each rebel as a follower of
the Druj, the Lie, the personification of Evil (ef. Tolman, PAPA,
102 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
38, 69), for it is the Druj which is the source of rebellion; drau-
ga di[s hami^'iyja akunaus, the Lie made them reheJJious, Bh. 4. 4.
YAv. druj (Middle Pers. druzitan), Skt. dmh.
duruva, adj. sound, itecure. Nom. sg. f. duruva, Bh. 4. 5. YAv.
drva, Skt. dhruva.
dtivaistam, adv. very long. Dar. Pers. e. 3. Ace. sg. n. of
superl. *duvaista, cf. diiraiy; Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 763; IF,
12. 127.
duvara (duvar, transf . to a- decl. ; cf . Skt. dvara, Whitney, Skt.
Gr. 399), m. door. Loo. sg. (with postpos. a) duvaraya, at {nuj)
door, Bh. 2. 13, 14. YAv. dvar (New Pers. dar, Oss. dvar), Skt.
dvar.
duvar^i, m. por'tico, colonnade. Aco. sg. duvarftm, Xerx. Peis.
a. 3. Bartholomae suggests haplography for duvar-varft.
duvitaparanam (Tolman, Vdt. Stad. 1, 8. *duvita, long, GAv.
daibita, Skt. dvita, against Geldner, Ved. Stud. 3. 1 ; cf . Gray,
JAOS, 23, 63, + paranam, iefore, antehac, q. v.), adv. long afore-
tirne. Bartholomae writes me under date of May 13, 1908, that
be takes paranam as I have suggested above, but concerning the
fii'st member of the compound he adds: "duvita ist clas mpp. dit,
alter. Das Ganze scheint mir danach zu bedeuten, cum altiro
2?rwr, alter cmm altero, post alterum. Das elamische samak-mar
bedeutet ex (= mar) ordhic, franz. de sidte." KT read duvitapar-
nam, in two lines, which is supported by Weissliauh (ZD]MG, 61,
725) who connects pamam with Skt. parna, lohig. Hoffmann-
Kutschke (Phil. Nov. 3, 103), whose treatment of the compound
defies philological laws, remarks: "pamam jedoch entspricht lat.
plenus, germ, fulna (sic), wM, uud steht f tir palna." These vii-sws, of
course, are in accord with Oppert's early interpretation, en dexw
IroMchts, which seems not only at variance with the Elam. samak-
mar, but to lack historical support; cf. Tolman and Stevenson,
Hdt. and Empires of East, 74. The old reading duvitataranam
with which critics have operated is superseded. KT record:
"The reading p in place of t is certain."
duvitiya, adj. second. Nom. sg. duvitiya (cf . Bartholomae, Alt-
iran. Wb., duvitiya-ma for duvitiyam of ed. and KT), Bh. 3. 5.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 103
iauv duvitiyama udapatata parsaly, he was the second to rise against
me in Persia. Ace. sg. n. (as adv.) duvitiyam, /<?r a second time.,
Bh. 3. 13, et passim. GAv. daibitya, YAv. bitya (New Pers. digar),
Skt. dvitiya.
dusiyara (duSiyar, transf. to a- decl.), n. had harvest., scarcity.,
J'amine. Nom. sg. dusiyaram, Dar. Pers. d. 3. "There is some
space between the i and the y, due apparently to an original de-
fect in the stone before it was lettered." Jackson, JAOS, 27, 191.
Abl. sg. du§iyara, Dar. Pers. d. 3. "The u is not clear but can
be made out." Jackson, JAOS, 27, 191. dus, ill, Av. dus (New
Pers. dus), Skt. dus + *yar, year, YAv. yar. Note Turf an MSS.
dusy&riy.
drauga, m. the Lie. Nom. sg. drauga. Abl. sg. (with haca)
drauga, Bh. 4. 5; Dar. Pers. d. 3. Ahura Mazda, as guardian of
Truth and Avenger of Deceit, is opposed to that force embodied
in the Lie. Hdt. testifies to the Persian veneration of truth
and abomination of deceit; ato-xicrTOv 8e airoto-t to if/evSea-Oai vevofiLO--
Tat, I. 138; TratSeuovo-t Be tous iraiSas — r/Diix ixovva tTrircuetv /cat To^eveiv Kal
aX-q&ii,e.<Tdai, I. 136. The Druj (drauga) is certainly a personification
of Evil (cf . Jackson, Grundr. d. iran. Philol. 11, 630). It is the
Druj which is the source of rebellion, Bh. 4. 4. The prayer of
Darius is that his country may be saved from the Druj, Pers. d.
3. He warns his successor to guard against the Druj and to
punish the liar, Bh. 4. .o. It was because Darius was not under
the influence of the Druj that he became the favorite of Ahura
Mazda, Bh. 4. 13. Morality is to walk in the path of Truth,
NRa. 6. This personification of the Avestan Druj in the Per-
sian drauga, found, as we should expect, no correspondence in the
Babylonian thought (cf. Gray, JAOS, 21, 181). How strikingly
is this seen in the contrast between drauga dahyauva vasiy abava, ths
Druj {Lie) dominated the province and the lame Babylonian
version par-sa-a-tu ina matati lu ma-du i-mi-du, in the lands lies hecanie
nvineroiis, Bh. 1. 10. Tolman in PAPA, 33, 69. In Bh. 4. 4.
drauga di[§ hami^^yja akunaus, KT ignore entirely this personifica-
tion in their translation, lies made them revolt. Cf. Wilhelni,
ZDMG, 40, 105; Bang, ZDMG, 43, 633; Foy, KZ, 35, 69; Horn,
Beilage zur Allg. Ztg. 1895; Jackson-Gray, JAOS, 21, 170.
YAv. draoga (Phi. drog, New Pers. duroy), Skt. drogha; fr. duruj (i. e.
druj.).
104 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
draujana, adj. deceiving, false, a follower of the Di^nj, cf.
drauga and Turfan MSS. drDzanly. Nom. sg. draujana, Bh. 4. 5,
13, 14. Jackson and KT record the legibility of draujana in Bh.
4. 1. 68. YAv. draojina-; fr. duruj (i. e. druj).
draujiya (denom. pres. to *d;auja, lie; Bartholomae, Grundr.
152), to regard as a lie. Pres. subj. 2 sg. [draujjiyahy, cf. Eaw-
linson, JEAS, 12. This form (cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb.,
769) is best read in Bh. 4. 6. KT give [durujjiyahy, but the con-
text as well as the Elam. shows a meaning impossible for this
verb. Cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 30.
drayah, n. sea. Ace. sg. draya, Dar. Sz. c. 3; thus read also
in Bh. 5. 1. 23, abiy draya in place of darayam of ed. The absence
of final m, as recorded by KT, gives the regular form and super-
sedes the theory that the word is here a transfer to the a- de-
clension; cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 36. Loc. sg. (with postpos.
a) drayahya. YAv. zrayah (Middle Pers. zray, New Pers. zirih), Skt.
jrayas, an expanse. Cf. Fick, BB, 41, 343.
N
naiba, adj. heautiful, Nom. sg. f. naiba, Dar. Pers. d. 2. Nom.
sg. n. naibam, Xerx. Pers. a. 3. Ace. sg. n. naibam, Xerx. Van.
3. Phi. nev, New Pers. niv, hrave, good.
naiy, adv. not; written nai with enclitics maiy and sim. YAt.
nae- cf. Delbriick, Vgl. Syntax, 2, 524. Otherwise Bartholomae,
Altiran. Wb., 1073.
nadi^tabaira (Elam. nititpei; Bab. ni-dm-tu-(iiu)bei), m. Xldintu-
Bi'l, name of a Babylonian rebel. Nom. sg. nadi"tabaira. Ace.
sg. nadi°tabairam. Gen. Sg. nadi"tabairahya. Cf. Duncker, Gesch.
d. Altert. 4^ 472.
napat, m. grandson. Nom. sg. napa (reformation with a; cf.
Bartholomae, Grundr. 397, n.), Bh. 1. 1; Bh. a. 1. Av. napat
(New Pers. nava), Skt. napat.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 105
nabukudracara (Elam. napkutumizir; Bab. nabu-kudum-usur), m.
JVebiichadreBar, the assumed name of the rebels Nidintu-B6l and
Arkha. Nom. sg. nabukudracara. Cf. Justi, ZDMG, 51, 236;
Weissbach, Grundr. d. iran. Philol. 2, 55.
nabunaita (Elam. napuneta; Bab. nabu-na'id), m. JVahonidits,
name of the last king of the new Babylonian empire (cf . Nabu-
na'id-Cyrus Chronicles); written in Hdt. Zahynetos, cf. Tolman
and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires of East, 81-6. Gen. sg.
nabunaitahya, Bh. 1. 16, nabunaitahya (Bartholomae, Grundr. il2, n;
thus to be read in Bh. 3. 14; 4. 2; Bh. d; Bh. i. cf. KT, 56).
naman, n. name. ii"am'', hy name, written n''am''a with fern.
noun. The following are some of the theories respecting this
latter form. J. Schmidt (Pluralbld. 82) regarded it as forming
the second member of a bahuvrihi-compound (Whitney, Skt.
Gr. 1293) with a fem. formation in *-6n, e. g. yutiya nama dahyaus,
a region possessing the name of Yutiyd. Thumb (KZ, 32, 132)
would derive nama from *n6mn comparing ga^u <gmtu. Foy (KZ,
35, 11) at first suggested a transition to the fem. of a sandhi-
form *naman < nomnn; cf. later IF, 12, 172 and note various the-
ories there cited. Bartholomae (Grundr. 403, II) proposed a
possible distinction of case nama (ace. sg.) and nama'' (loc. sg.),
but has later shifted his position, taking both forms as loc. sg.
and transcribing nama" and nama"- Can we regard n^am^a as
scriptio plena influenced by fem. ? Cf. gen. sg. -Ii''y''a < Ar. -sia,
often written hV" when immediately preceding the noun on
which it depends. Tolman in Vdt. Stud. 1, 12. Av. naman (New
Pers. nam, Oss. non, Afy. num, Bal. nam), Skt. naman.
navama, adj. ninth. Nom. sg. navama, Bh. 1. 4; Bh. a. 4.
Skt. navama, YAv. nauma (Jackson, Av. Gr. 64).
naviya, Bh. 1. 18. The word is generally regarded as nom.
f. of an abstract formation from nav, shij>, and as signifying a
collection of ships, fleet; so Kern (ZDMG, 23, 237), Mtiller
(WZKM, 11, 252), Gray (AJP, 21, 19), Bartholomae (Altiran.
Wb., 1065). The old interpretation {hei den Schiffen, WB), de-
fended by Foy (ZDMG, 54, 371) regards the form as loc. sg. of
nav with paistpos. a; SO Pedersen, KZ, 40, 129, on opposite side
(the enemy) was on shiphoard. Skt. nav, ship, New Pers. nav.
]00 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
nas, see viyana[sa]ya.
nah, m. /low. Ace. sg. naham, Bh. 2. 13, 14. YAv. nah, Skt.
nas.
niy, \'erbal prefix, doion. e. g., Xerx. Van. 3, nipistanaiy. Av.
ni (New Pers. ni-), Skt. ni.
ni (Pres. naya, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to lead. Act. pret.
3 sg. anaya, Bh. 2. 14. Mid. pret. 3 sg. (with passive sense)
anayata, Bh. 1. 17. Av. ni (Middle Pers. nitan), Skt. ni.
with prefix fra(?), lead forth, hring foriuard. Pret. 1 sg.
franayam, Bh. 1. 18. aniyahya asam f ranayam, ybr the rest Ihrought
fijrward horses. KT state that the reading franayam is probable
from the traces on the rock. Jackson (JAOS, 24, S7) feels less
certain respecting the prefix. "I appended a further note that
the appearance of the word suggested rather [upjanayam or [uz]a-
nayam, Imt such a restoration is quite uncertain, though I tried
my best to assure it by examining the weathered stone again
and again."
nij, verbal prefix, away. Bh. 2. 12, nijayam; see i. Av. nis, Skt.
nis-
nipadiy, adv. in, pursidt of, close after. Read nipadiy for tyai-
patiy of ed. in Bh. 2. 1. 72 (cf. KT, 36), adam karam fraisayam nipa-
diy, I sent forth my army in pursuit. The word hardly means
on foot as given by KT and ed. Both Elam. and Bab. versions
give no warrant for this older interpretation of the word. Bh.
3. 12. hada kara nipadi[y] t[ya]iy asiyava, he went irith his army close
on the heels of these. Cf . Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1. 26. Probably
loc. sg. of niy + pad, foot; cf . Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb. , 1083,
who happily compares Lesb. Boeot. ireS-a (instr. sg. to ttovs). To
this might be added Lat. fsHseciaus, following one^s steps.
niyasadayam, see had.
nisaya (Elam. nissaya; Bab. ni-is-sa-a-a), m. name of a Median
district. Nom. sg. nisaya, Bh. 1. 13. niy + *saya; fr. *si, lie,
YAv. si (Middle Pers. nisitan), Ski. ci.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 107
nuram (Jackson and KT record the absence of a lacuna before
the word in Bh. 4. 10), adv. nov). Av. nuram (Oss. nur. New
Pers. nun).
nyaka, m. grandfather, supplied in Art. Sus. a. arta[xsa^'am
nyakam], Artaxerxes my grandfather. YAt. nyaka.
pa (Pres. pa-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 122), to protect, sustain.
Act. impv. 2 sg. padiy. 3 sg. patuv. Part. nom. sg. m. pata. Av.
pa (New Pers. payaS), Skt. pa.
with prefix patiy (Pres. paya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 148),
guard oneself (mid.) against (abl. with haca). Impv. 2 sg. patipa-
yauva, Bh. 4. 5.
paisiyauvada (piMyauvada, Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 908.
Bab. pi-si-'-hu-ma-du), f . name of a district. Ace. sg. paiSiyauvadam,
Bh. 3. 7. Abl. sg. (with haca) paisiyauvadaya, Bh. 1. 11. AccordT
ing to Justi (IF, 17, Anz. 107) Pasargada, paiSiya, fr. pi§ (q. v.) +
*uvada, Skt. svadha, abode; Ort der Schriften, i. e. , depository of
the archives and sacred books. Cf. Oppert, La. langue — des
M^des, 110.
pat (Pres. pata-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to fly, fall. YAv.
pat (New Pers. uftadan), Skt. pat.
with prefix ud, rise up, rebel. Mid. pret. 3 sg. udapatata.
patiy, prep, postpos. l)with ace. during, throughout, at; cf .
Foy. WZKM, 14, 291. Bh. 2. 11. ^uravaharahya mahya jiyamnam
(q. V.) patiy, at the end of the month Thuravdha.ra. Bh. 1. 7.
xsapava raucapativa, by night or daij. 2)with instr. at, Bh. 3. 5.
hya v'fepatiy, which vms at the palace. 3) with loc. in, at, Bh. 2.
13, et passim, uzmayapatiy akunavam, / crucified. Av. paiti (Tur-
fan MSS. pad, New Pers. paS-).
patiy, adv. on the other hand, moreover, again, once more. Bh.
2. 9, et passim, patiy ^''itlyam ha[m]i^'"[iya] ha^gmata, again far thf.
third time the confederates assemhled. Postpos. , not always with
108 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
the adversative force which Foy gives it. Xerx. Pers. a. 3.
tyapatiy kartam, morecmer luhat worh; Elam. appa sarak huttukka.
Dar. NRa. 4. yadipatiy (sic, cf . Stolze's Phot. , Persepolis II, 109)
maniya[ha]y (cf. Stolze's Phot.), furthermore if tJiou thinhest,
where again the Elam. has sarak for Persian patiy. On the ground
that sarak also renders patiy above, Foy argues that they are iden-
tical. Bartholomae, on the other hand, still adheres to the old
view that patiy in the last two passages cited is an enclitic parti-
cle with indefinite force and has no etymological connection with
patiy, the prep, and adv.
patikara, m. picture, likeness. Ace. sg. patikaram. Ace. pi.
patikara. patiy -|- kar (q. v.). Cf. New Pers. paikar, Horn, NS, 26.
patigrabana (Elam. pattikrappana), f. name of a Parthian town.
Nom. sg. patigrabana. patiy + grab (q. V.).
patipada, adj. in its oion place. Ace. sg. n. patipadam, Bh. 1.
14. ava adam patipadam aktmavam, I put it in place (i. e. restored it).
patiy -J- *pada (thematic), foot. Av. pad (Phi. pal, Turf an MSS.
pftd, New Pers. pai, Afy. pal), Skt. pad.
patis, prep, with ace. agai')ist, towards. Cf . patiy; for final s
of patis see Brugmann, KZ, 27, 417 vs. Schmidt, Pluralbld. 352.
patisuvari, adj. a Patiscliorian. Nom. sg. m. patisuvaris, Dar.
NRc. Cf. Horn, KZ, 38, 290.
paW, f . way, path. Ace. sg. paftm, Dar. NRa. 6. paftm tyam
rastam ma avarada, depart not from the true way. Cf. Av. pa^a
(Oss. fandag) Skt. panthan.
paya, the second word in Seal Inscr. d. vahyav'sda paya accord-
ing to WB.
para, prep, postpos. with ace. e. g. avapara, tliere lefore, Bh.
3. 12. This reading confirmed by KT sets aside Foy's conjec-
ture avadapara, davor. Av. para, Skt. pura.
para, adj. after, e. g. hyaparam(adv.), thereafter, Bh. 3. 7. hya
(abl. sg.) + param (ace. Sg. n.). Av. para-, Skt. para.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 109
paranam, adv. formerly. Bh. 1. 13. hya paranam bardiyam adana,
who Jiadlcnovm Smerdis formerly ; so Bartholomae. As an adj.
Gray (AJP, 21, 15) the former Bardiya, and ed. Ace. sg. n. of
adj. fr. para, heforc.
pariy, prep, with ace. about, concerning. Bh. 1. 13. pariy
gaumatam, concerning Gaumata. Av. pairi (New Pers. par-, Bal. pir),
Skt. pari.
paru, adj. many. Nom. sg. n. paruv, Bh. 4. 8. Gen. pi. m.
parunam (written p°r"uv''ii''am'' in Dar. NRa. 1; Art. Pers. a. b. 1).
For gen. pi. f . parunam, Dar. Pers. e. 1. YAv. pouru (Bartholo-
mae, Grundr. 298, 3. Middle Pers. pur), Skt. puru.
paruva, adj. V)former. Nom. pi. m. paruva, Bh. 4. 9. 'i)east-
ern, loe. sg. n. paruvaiy, Dar. Pers. e. 2, on the east (written
p°r^iv''iy'' by stone-cutter's blunder for p^r^uv^iy^; cf . Bartholomae,
Altiran. Wb., 872, n. 8). YAv. paurva, Skt. purva.
paruvam, adv. formerly, Bh. 1. 4, 10, 14. Ace. sg. n. of
paruva.
paruviyata, adv. haca paruviyata, froTn long ago, Bh. 1. 3, 12.
*paruviya, _7?rs^, hefore. GAv. paouruya, Skt. purvya + suffix ta.
paruzana, adj. containing many kinds of people. Gen. pi.
paruvzananam, Dar. El vend, 2; (written paruv | zananam in Xerx.
Pers. a. 2; ca. cb. 2; Van, 2:, paruvzananam in Xerx. Pers. b. 2;
da. db. 2; El vend, 2). paru (q. v.) + *zana, man, Skt. jana; fr.
*zan, give birth, YAv. zan (New Pers. zayaS), Skt. jan.
parga (Elam. parrakka), m. Nom. sg. parga, Bh. 3. 7. Thus
written instead of paraga of KT and ed. ; ef . Foy, KZ, 35, 13.
New Pers. purg.
pari9ava (Elam. partuma; Bab. pa-ar-tu-u), m. Parthia, Parthian.
Nom. sg. parfeva. Loc. Sg. par^avaiy. Instr. pi. parfevaibi[s], Bh.
2. 1. 96.
parsa, inchoative stem (s = I. E. xsx', Bartholomae, Grundr.
135; Skt. prcha-ti, Av. parasaiti, Turf an MSS. pursld, New Pers.
110 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
pursaS), to ash, examine into, punish. Impv. 2 sg. parsa. Pret.
1 sg. aparsam.
with prefix patiy, examine, read. Subj. 2 sg. patiparsahy, 3
sg. patiparsatiy.
parsa (Elam. parsir; Bab. par-sa-a-a), l)aclj. Persian. Nom. sg.
m. parsa. Aco. Sg. m. parsam. Instr. Sg. m. parsa. Gen. sg. m.
parsahya. 2)As Subs. m. Persia. Nom. sg. parsa. Ace. sg. par-
sam. Instr. sg. parsa (with ana, q. v.), Xerx. Pers. a. 3. Abl. sg.
(with haca) parsa, Dar. NRa. 3, 4; Sz. C. 3. Loo. sg. parsaiy. In
addition to the places of occurrence KT record an omitted line,
Bh. 3. 1. 53; ima tya mana kartam parsaiy | 5atiy darayavaus xsayaftya.
pasa, prep, with gen. after. Bh. 3. 6. pasa mana, with, me.
pasa is probably for *passa < *pasca, Av. pasca (New Pers. pas),
Skt. pacca < *pas-ac-a (instr. Whitney, Skt. Gr. 1112, e.); cf.
Gray, AJP, 21, 8, and Grierson, ZDMG, 50, 25. Otherwise
Bartholomae, Altiran, Wb., 879 and Foy, KZ, 35, 26.
pasava, adv. tliereafter, afterwards, pasa (q. v.) + ace. sg. n.
ava. According to Bartholomae's reference to M6nant and Da-
ressy (Recueil de trav.) pasava is to be supplied after aitiy in 1. 10
of Dar. Sz. c. 3, though ed. show no lacuna here. For [pas]ava
avada karam of ed. read [a]vada avam karam in Bh. 1. 1. 88; cf.
KT, 18. pasava is wrongly supplied in ed. in Bh. 2. 1. 29.
"There is no gap here; the clause is not introduced by pasava,
the proper name dadarsis being the first word in the sentence.
All the signs in the line are clear upon the rock." KT. [pasava]
is also wrongly supplied by KT and ed. in Bh. 2. 1. 49, where
the corresponding word fails in Elam. and Bab. versions. Its
omission would have an important bearing on Weissbach's inter-
pretation of hamahyaya 6arda, in the same yea?', in Bh. 1. 2, 6, 7,
9, 12.
pitar, m. fafJier. Nom. sg. pita. Gen. sg. pi^''a, Xerx. Pers.
a. 4. tya mana kartam uta tyamaiy piS'a kartam; Pers. ca. cb. 3. Av.
pitar (Turfan MSS. pidar, New Pers. pidar), Skt. pitr; cf. Wack-
ernagel, Ai. Gram. 16.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 111
pirava, m. the river JVile. Nom. sg. pirava, Dar. Sz. c. 3. adam
ni[yas]tayam imam [yuviya]m ka°tanaiy haca pirava nama rauta, I ordet'fil
to dig this canal from the river the Nile hy name. Foy (KZ,
35, 31) argues for a construction of an ace. with haca and regards
pirava nama as a bahuvrihi compound. Thumb (KZ, 32, 129)
makes the anacohithon the equivalent of haca rauta — pirava nama
rauta — haca ada; of. Bartholomae, BB, 14, 241>; Foy, IF, 12, 176.
pisa, reading of ed. and KT in Bh. 5. 1. 24. According to
Justi (IF, 17, Anz. 126), the instr. sg. (in collective sense) of
pisa, raft., fr. pis (q. v.). pisa viyatarayam, I crossed on rafts. Cf.
Foy, KZ, 37, 529.
pis. The primitive meaning of the root (I. E. peik) seems to
be cut., trim, rather ^&Vi. faring inachen which Bartholomae gives.
A survival of this signification we see in such a passage as RV.
1, 161, 10, mansam ekah piiicati, the one carves the meat; in Old
Slav, pisa, pisati, to scratch in, vrite; in Gr. ttoikIXos as applied to
work in metal, stone and wood, and Trt/c-pds (nil gi'ade), cutting.,
sharp., stinging., e. g. oQ ' I^Trco-e -rriKpoi ola-TO's, where the piercing
arrow had fcdlen, A. 217; OvyaripK TriKpas wSivas exovo-ai, sharj)
pains, A. 271 (cf. oieZai oSuVat, ibid. 268). The transfer to the
familiar adorn (Middle Pers. pesit, orvavienfcd) which is the
meaning of the root in YAv. is, of course, natural and seen in
many of the cognates; e. g. pic, to oma/zient, Goth, filu-faiha
translating ttoKvitolkiXos of Ephes. 3, 10. Tolman in Vdt. Stud.
1, 31.
with prefix niy, cut (an inscription), s- aor. 1 sg. niyapis-
am, Bh. 4. 15, 21. Inf. nipistanaiy, Xerx. Van, 3. Part. ace. sg.
n. nipistam, Bh. 4. 8. Acc. sg. f. nipistam, Xerx. Van, 3. Note
Turfan MSS. nibilt.
pu°tiya, adj. name of a people. Nom. pi. m. pu"tiya, Dar.
NRa. 3.
pu6''a, m. son. Nom. sg. pu^'a. Av. pu^ra (Turfan MSS. ptis,
pflr, puhr, New Pers. pusar, Oss. furth), Skt. putra.
112 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
F
fra, verbal prefix, forth/ e. g., frabara (fra + abara). Av. fra.
(Phi. fra, New Pers. far), Skt. pra.
fratama, adj. first^ foremost. Nom. pi. m. fratama. fra (q. v.)
+ superl. suffix tama.
fratarta, reading confirmed by KT in Bh. 3. 1. 26. See s. \.
tar.
frada (Elam. pirrata; Bab. pa-ra-da-'), m. name of a Margian
rebel. Nom. sg. frada. Cf. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 106.
framatar, m. -master., lord. Ace. sg. framataram, Xerx. El-
vend, 1. aivam parunam framataram, one lord of (i. e. over^ many., et
passim; (written wrongly framataram, Dar. NJRa. 1, framataram.
Art. Pers. a. b. 1; cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 987). New
Pers. farmaSar, Skt. pramatr; fr. fra + ma (q. v.).
framana, f. command., precept. Nom. sg. framana, Dar. NRa.
6. Turf an MSS. framftn. New Pers. farman; fr. fra + ma (q. v.),
Cf. Pedersen, KZ, 39, 344.
fravarti (Elam. pimimartis; Bab. pa-ar-u-mar-ti-is; Gr. */)ac'pT7;s),
m. Phraortes, a Median rebel. See Tolman and Stevenson, Hdt.
and Empires of East, 68 ff; Weissbach, ZDMG, 51, 517. Nom.
sg. fravartis. Acc. sg. fravartim. Gen. Sg. fravartais.
frasa'm y(?)adayaniaiy, an emendation which I suggested in
Dar. Sus. a. for the uncertain word.
fraharavam, adv. altogetlier, in all, Bh. 1. 6. Thus to be read
instead of fraharvam of KT and ed. ; cf. Bartholomae, BB, 13, 69;
Foy, KZ, 35, 4. n. Acc. sg. n. of *fraliarava, all; fra + *harava,
cf. haruva (q. v.).
B
baxtri (Bab. ba-ah-tar), f. Bactria. Nom. sg. baxtris. Loc. sg.
baxtriya. Cf. Foy, KZ, 35, 65, who discuss the proper name in
reference to the Elam. (baxtris = pakturris; *bax^''is = paksis).
YAv. baxSi (New Pers. baxr).
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 113
baga, m. god. Nom. sg. baga. Nom. p). bagaha. Instr. pi.
bagaibis. Gen. pi. baganam. For plurality of gods see Jackson-
Gray, JAOS, 21, 168; Tolman, PAPA, 33, 68. The polytheism
of the Deirmenjik Inscription of Darius {ttjv mlp OeZv fiov SidOea-Lv,
cf. Cousin-Deschamps, Bull, de corr. hell. 13, 530) is probably
due to political considerations. The plural occurs once in YAv.
(Yt. 10, 141), yet more frequently in Pahlavi. YAv. baya (Mid-
dle Pers. bay, Turfan MSS. bagiystOm), Skt. bhaga. Cf. Fick,
BB, 41, 341.
bagabigna (Elam. pakapikna), m. name of the father of Vidarna.
Gen. sg. bagabignahya, Bh. 4. 18. *baga which may be connected
with YAv. baya, apportionment, -{- *bigna(?). Otherwise Justi,
ZDMG, 49, 682; Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 922.
bagabuxsa (Elam. pakapuksa; Bab. ma-ga-bu-di-Su; Gr. Meya/3v^os),
Megabyzos, one of the allies of Darius in the defeat of false
Smerdis. Nom. sg. ba[gab]uxsa, Bh. 4. 18. baga (q. v.) -f- *bux§a,
fr. *buj, to free, YAv. buj (Middle Pers. boxtan).
bagayadi (Elam. pagiyatis), f. name of a month, Sept. -Oct.
(Oppert, Weissbach). Gen. sg. bagayadais, Bh. 1. 13. baga (q. v.)
+ *yada, worship, fr. yad (q. v.).
baji, m. tribute. Ace. sg. bajim. New Pers. baz; fr. *baj, to
allot, YAv. baj (Middle Pers. baxtan), Skt. bhaj.
ba"d (I. E. *bhendii), to hind. Part. nom. sg. m. basta (I. E.
*blmdli-to-s), Bh. 1. 17; 2. 13, 14. YAv. band (Turfan MSS. bast,
New Pers. bandad), Skt. bandh.
ba^daka, adj. subject; as subs, servant, subject. Nom. sg.
ba'^daka. Nom. pi. f. ba^daka, Bh. 1. 7. *ba°da, bond, YAv. banda
(New Pers. band), Skt. bandha, -f suffix ka; lit. Tie who is in bonds.
babiru (Elam. papili; Assyr. in oldest documents babiiu, babili,
gate of god; in later documents babilani, gate of the gods, whence
Gr. Ba/SuXo)v), m. Babylon, Babylonia. Nom. sg. babirus. Ace.
sg. babirum. Abl. Sg. (with haca) babiraus. Loc. Sg. babirauv.
babiruviya, adj. Bahy Ionian. Nom. sg. m. babiruviya. Ace.
sg. m. babiruvl[ya]m (thus read in Bh. 3. 1. 86 in place of babirauv
114 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
of ed. ; cf. KT, 58). Nom. pi. (as subs, the BabylonianH) babi-
ruviya, Bh. 3. 14. Acc. pi. babiruvi[y]a, Bh. 3. 1. 88. babiruvi[y]a
aja'", he smote the Bahylo7viuiist (thus read in place of babimm agar-
baya of ed. ; cf . KT, 58).
bar (Pres. bara-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to hrar, sustain,
esteem. Act. ind. pres. 3 jol. bara"tiy, Dar. NRa. 1. Pret. 1 sg,
abaram. 3 sg. abara (written ar^r" by stone-cutter's blunder in Bh.
3. 1. 67; cf. KT, 54). 3 pi. abara" Impv. 3 sg. baratuv. Mid. ,
ind. pret. 3 pi. abara^ta, Bh. 1. 7. Av. bar (Turfan MSS. burdan,
New Pers. baraS, Gil. bardan, Kiis. bartan), Skt. bhr.
with prefix patiy -|- a, bring hack, restore. Pret. 1 sg.
patiyabaram, Bh. 1. 14.
with prefix para, hear away, take away. Pret. 3 sg. para-
bara, Bh. 1. 14, 19. Part. nom. sg. n. paraba[rta]m, Bh. 1. 14.
with prefix party, protect, preserve. Pres. subj. 2 sg.
paribarahy (paribar- to be read in place of parikar- in Bh. 4. 11. 72,
74, 78. "The character b is certain." KT), Bh. 4. 17. yadiy
[naijydis paribarahy, if tfum shaJt 11 ot protect them. Bh. 4. 16.
paribarah(i)dis. pari[ba]ra (subj. 2 Sg., not impV. ; cf. the preceding
vikanahy, q. v.), Bh. 4. 15. avafesta (KT) pari[ba]ra, which Hofi-
mann-Kutschke (Phil. !Nc)v. 3. 10."i) would understand; vu stehe
da (wie ich hier im Relief), halt (sie) im Zaume (== gefesselt).
with prefix fra, proffer, grant. Pret. 3 sg. frabara.
barataya, reading of ed. and confirmed by KT in Bh. 5. 1. 2:^,
where Foy would emend [xaudajm tigram bara'^ty, (Scythians who)
^oear the pointed cap, but KT's cuneiform text reads sakam in 1. Ii2
which makes this theory impossible (unless we ascribe a blunder
here to the work of the two English scholars).
bardiya (Elam. pirtiya; Bub. bar-zH-a), m. Sr)i('rdl>t, brother oi
Cambyses. For the prothotio o- in S/ie'pS'^ of Hdt. (cf. MdpSos,
MdpSis, Aesch. Pers. 765) see Kretschmer, KZ, 29, 440. Nom.
sg. bardiya. Acc. Sg. bardiyam. Cf. YAv. bsrazant, lofty, Turfan
MSS. burzlst. Bartholomae. ZDMG, 48, 155; Foy. KZ, 37, 5;l(;;
Justi, TF, 17, Anz. 103.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON H^
bu (Pres. bava-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to le. Ind. pret.
1 eg. abavam. 3 Sg. abava. 3 pi. abava". Subj. 3 Sg. bavatiy, Dar.
JiRa. 4. Opt. 2 sg. biya (Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 33; Weissbach,
ZDMG, 61, 729; Bartholomae, WZKM, 22, 88). 3 sg. biya (I.
E. bhu-i-ie-t, Bartholomae, Grundr. 143). Av. bu (New Pers.
buvaS), Skt. bhu.
bumi, f . earth. Ace. sg. bumim (written bmnam in Art. Pers. a.
b. 1). Gen. sg. bumiya. Av. bumi (New Pers. bum), Skt. bhumi.
bratar, m. 'brother. Nom. sg. brata, Bh. 1. 10, 11. Av. bratar
(New Pers. biradar, Kurd, bara, Oss. arvada), Skt. bhratr.
M
m* in Seal Inscr. e. m" xarsadaSya. According to Justi, IF, 17,
Anz. 112, the expression for seal., *maraka, New Pers. marah.
ma, prohibitive ptcl. not; l)with opt., Bh. 4. 11, 17; Dar.
Pers. d. 3; 2)with injunctive, Bh. 4. 10, 14; Dar. Pers. e. 3;
NRa. 6. Av. ma (New Pers. ma), Skt. ma. Cf. Delbrtick, Vgl.
Syntax, 3, 288.
ma, to measure. Av. ma (New Pers. azmayaS, Oss. amain), Skt.
with prefix a, extend {i. e. he of ancient lineage), ox prove
oneself. Part. nom. pi. amata, Bh. 1. 3; Bh. a, where Andreas-
Htising would emend adata, noble., i. e. of ancient family (KZ,
38, 255. Cf. also the supplement of Bab. [mar]-banuti which,
however, renders fratama in Bh. 23, 77, 83, 88); Yet KT's cunei-
form text plainly gives m in Bh. 1. 3.
ma, pron. stem. See adam.
maka (Elam. makka), adj. as subs, name of a people. Nom.
sg. m. maka, Bh. 1. 6; Dar. Pers. e. 2. Hdt. 4. 175, oi MaKat.
magu (Elam. makus; Bab. ma-gu-su; Gr. Mayoc), adj. as subs.
name of a Median tribe celebrated in priestcraft (cf. Jackson,
IIG ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
Zoroaster), Marjian. Nom. sg. magus. Ace. sg. magum. Phi.
magi. Cf. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 103.
maciya, adj. as subs, name of a people. Nom. pi. maciya.
For the reading iyam maciya in Dar. NRe. , see s. v. iyam. Hdt. 4.
191, Md^ws.
matya, conj. with subj. that not, lest, not. Bh. 1. 13; 4. 6, 8,
15. ma + tya (q. v.).
ma^ista, adj. \)tlie greatest. Nom. sg. m. maftsta. 2) As subs.
chief, leader. Nom. sg. maftsta. Ace. sg. maftstam. Superl. to
*ma6, great, YAv. mas (Middle Pers. mas, New Pers. mih, Horn,
NS, 42, 2).
mada (Elam. mata; Bab. ma-da-a-a; Gr. MvjSot), l)adj. Median.
Nom. sg. m. mada. Acc. sg. m. madam. Instr. pi. mada[ibi]s, Bh.
2. 6. Loc. pi. madaisuva, Bh. 2. 6. 2)As subs. Media. Nom.
sg. mada. Acc. Sg. madam. Loc. Sg. madaiy.
man (Pres. maniya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 147), to tldiik. Mid.
subj. 2 sg. maniyahay, Bh. 4. 5; Dar. Pers. e. 3; NRa. 4; so Bar-
tholomae for maniyahy of ed. 3 Sg. mamya[taiy] , thus read in Bh.
4. 1. 50. The a is attested by KT's examination. Jackson (JAOS,
24, 89) feels less certain, for he remarks that "despite syntacti-
cal grounds " there is no space for a. Av. man, Skt. man.
man (Pres. manaya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 151), to remain,
Pret. 3 sg. amanaya, Bh. 2. 9, 11. amaniya, Bh. 2. 6 (cf. KT, 26).
Av. man (New Pers. mandan).
maniya, n. estate (?). Cf. Turfan ]\ISS. m&nbed. Acc. sg.
maniyam, Bh. 1. 14. Some of the meanings which have been
proposed for this douVjtful word are the following: dwelling
places (KT); les maiso)is (Darmesteter, jfitud. Ii-an. 2. 129); le
fffw (Rugarii); das ^Yt>llnenQN'Q)•, liegende Hal)' (^&T:t\iQ\oma,Q);
real extate (Gray, AJP, 21, 16; cf. YAv. nmana); Justi (IF, 17,
Anz. 108) translates, ILninl'omphxo (maniya von mana, Ilatts, wie
naviya, F lot i lie, von *nau, also Platze wo etwa Gewerbetreibende
oder Handler, Reprusentanten dcr btigerlichen Untertanen,
wohnen). Cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 13.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON \\J
[m^n^uv^fm", a proposed reading of Jackson (JAOS, 24, 93)
for KT's + + fVuv^H-'m" (q. v.). "The text is indeed much mu-
tilated, but each of the letters u, v, t, m is legible. (The letter
of) the first part of the word (is) apparently n"" — . The sketch
made in my notes looks precisely like n''. A further examina-
tion of the damaged part revealed an apparent m preceding this,
so that we may assume that the word began with m." A possi-
ble comparison with Skt. manuvat, icie Mermchtn is suggested.
Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 729) reads naiy sakauri[m naiy + J nuvatam,
weder dem Flndlhig noch dem Arriien. The Bab. apparently
renders by muskinu. We might compare manbSd of Turfan MSS.
So Hoffmann-Kutschke who renders, Knecht undllerr (manuvant).]
+ + + + mamaita (KT's cuneiform text; +_,. + + mamita, KT's
transliteration), mutilated proper name in Bh. 5. 1.
mar (Pres. mariya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 148), to die. Mid.
pret. 3 sg. amariyata, Bh. 1. 11. YAv. mar (Turfan MSS. murd.
New Pers. mirad), Skt. mr.
m" + + + (Elam. mams; Bab. ma-ru-'), to be read mam, m. name
of a Median town. Nom. sg. m[am]s, Bh. 2. 6; cf. KT, 25.
margava, adj. as subs. Margian. Nom. sg. margava. Instr. pi.
margavaibis, thus read in Bh. 3. 1. 16 in place of margayaibis of ed,
"The sign is v not y." KT.
margU (Elam markus; Bab. mar-gu-'; Gr. Mapyos, Mapyiavrj), m.
Marglana. Nom. sg. margus. Ace. sg. margum. Loo. sg. margauv.
YAv. maryu (New Pers. marv).
martiya, m. man. Nom. sg. martiya. Ace. sg. martiyam. Gen.
sg. martiyahya (written in Art. Pers. a. martihya). Voo. sg. martiya,
Dar. NRa. 6. Nom. pi. martiya. Ace. pi. martiya. Instr. pi.
martiyaibis. Av. masya (New Pers. mard, Kurd, mlr), Skt. martya;
fr. mar (q. v.).
martiya (Elam. martiya; Bab. mar-ti-ia), m. name of a Susian
rebel. Nom. sg. martiya. Ace. sg. martiyam.
marda, doubtful word in Bh. 6. 1. 11. Foy (KZ, 35, 48) would
emend utasim amarda, und vernichtete es, connecting the word with.
118 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
Skt. mrd. KT record; uta daiy marda where one feels strongly
tempted to read uta sis amarda, and he annihilated them. Cf . Tol-
man, Vdt. Stud. 1, 36.
marduniya (Elam. martuniya; Gr. MapSwtos), m. Mardonius,
father of Gobryas. Gen. sg. marduniyaliya, Bh. 4. 18.
mazdah, see s. v. aura and auramazdah.
maska, shin, float of shins. Loc. pi. maskauva, text as con-
fii-med by KT in Bh. 1. 1. 86, who fail to appreciate the value of
their record, since they attempt no translation and even sug-
gest the possibility of taking the obliquely-meeting wedges of
the cuneiform sign for u as the word-divider, thus giving maska
dava. The new reading proves the correctness of Justi's conjec-
ture (IF, 17, Anz. 125; cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 533) as loc. pi. of maska;
cf. Assyr. mas-ku-u, shin, Aram, meska. It is in Persian a loan
word (New Pers. mask) and has reference to the manner of cross-
ing the river, which has been in vogue from early times to the
present day, i. e. , on inflated skins or a raft or bridge supported
by such skins. The Assyrian reliefs (e. g. Layard's Nineveh,
fig. 52) show the method. Xen. (Anab. 2. 4. 28) speaks of the
rafts as o-xcSiais Si^^EptVats. The meaning of the passage is now
quite clear and this reading supersedes the various attempted
emendations (cf. KZ, 35, 35; AJP, 21, 20; ZDMG, 46, 2M).
Jackson (JAOS, 24, 85) records that the first part of the word
looks more like m'V", hut later writes in a personal letter to
Justi: "Your conjecture is so brilliant that I am almost tempted
to doubt my reading, but the y did seem quite certain in my
notes, for I examined the word with great care." Tolman in
Vdt. Stud. 1, 15.
mah, m. month, with gen. of the name. Loc. sg. (with post-
pos. a) mahya. Gray (AJP, 21, 14) returns to the older view of
regarding mahya as contracted from mahahya (them. gen. sg. ; cf.
Skt. masa) and thus avoids the " appositional genitive" of the
name. For the seasons of the Persian months see Justi, ZDMG,
51; Oppert, ibid. 52; KT, xxvi; Prasek Beitrage z. alt. Gesch.
1901. Av. mah (Turf an MSS. pur-mah. New Pers. mah, Oss.
maya), Skt. mas.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 119
mi0ra, m. the god Mithra; cf. Hillebrandt, Ved. Myth. 3, 128;
Jackson, JAOS, 21, 169; Grundr. d. iran. Philol. 2, 40; Tolman,
PAPA, 33, 69. Norn. sg. mi^ra, Art. Sus. a; Art. Pers. a. b. 4,
(written m'tra, Art. Ilamadan; cf. Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb.,
1185, n.). Av. mi^ra (New Pers. mihr), Skt. mitra.
mu^ (Pres. ma&a.-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 124), to flee.' Pret. 3
sg. amrxOa.. Cf . Hlising, KZ, 38, 258. This interpretation (which
is favored by both Elam. and Bab. versions) is undoubtedly cor-
rect and supersedes the former view of regarding amufe as an adv.
Cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 21. In Bh. 3. 1. 71 read am[u5a] in
place of maftsta of ed.
mudraya (Elam. muzzariya; Bab. mi-sir; Steph. Byz. Mvo-pa), adj.
as subs. Egyptian, Egypt. Nom. sg. mudraya. Ace. sg. mudrayam,
Dar. Sz. c. 3. Abl. sg. [mudra]ya, Dar. Sz. c. 3. Loc. sg. mud-
rayaiy, Dar. Sz. c. 3. Nom. pi. mudraya, Dar. Pers. e. 2; NEa. 3.
yautiya (Elam. yautiyas; Bab. i-u-ti-ia), f. name of a Persian dis-
trict. Nom. sg. yautiya, Bh. 3. 6.
y"u + + + +, read by Bartholomae (IF, 12, 132) yauaa"tim (act.
pres. part. f. to yaud, YAv. yaoz, ie in commotion); by WB^,
yu[diya], in Aufruhr; WB", yau^^ + +, Dar. NEa. 4. auramaz[da
ya^]a avaina imam bumim y°u + + + + pasavadim mana frabara, vihen AKura
3£azda saw this earth in rebellion, thereafter he game it to m,e.
yauna (Elam. iyauna; Bab. ia-a-ma-nu), adj. as subs. Ionian, land
of the lojiians. Nom. sg. yauna, Dar. NEa. 3. Nom. pi. yaima.
Cf. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 99.
yata, conj. l)while, when, 2)wntil. Cf. Delbrtick, Vgl. Syn-
tax, 3, 3.34.
ya^a, conj. l)as, 2)when, S)hecause, ^in order that, that. Barth-
olomae, by reference to Mfenant and Daressy (Eecueil de trav.)
reads avafe yafe for pa[s]ava in 1. 11 of Dar. Sz. c. 3. Av. yafe^
Skt. yatha. Cf. KZ, 33, 423; ZDMG, 46, 297; WZKM, 3. 147;
Delbrilck, Vgl. Syntax, 3. 429.
X20 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
yad (Pres. yada-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to worshij). Mid.
subj. 3 sg. yadataiiy], thus read in Bh. 5. 1. 34: (cf. KT, 83), con-
firming Bartholomae's conjecture (Foy, yadatiy, KZ, 35, 48).
The same form I supplied (Vdt. Stud. 1, 36) in the lacuna of Bh.
5. 1. 19, hya auramazdam ya[dataiy]. Pret. 1 Sg. ayadaiy, recorded
by KT in Bh. 5. 2, who attempt no interpretation, yet I regard
it as quite likely the root yad; cf. Vdt. Stud. 1, 36. I also
would emend y(?)adayamaiy, Dar. Sus. a. Av. yaz (Middle Pers.
yastan, New Pers. yazdan, cf. Horn,' NS, 37, 2), Skt. yaj.
yadaya, abl. with haca of an uncertain word in Bh. 3. 6, con-
firmed by KT who translate, from my allegiance. This attested
reading makes improbable Foy's ya[u]daya {hampf. cf . Skt. yodh-
ana, -j- aya, gang) vom Jcriegszug., and haca yutiya (Or. Litt. Ztg.
Nov., 1905).
yadiy, conj. 1)?^", '2)when. For yadipatiy (sic) see s. v. patiy,
adv. Cf. Delbruck, Vgl. Syntax, 3, 314. YAv. ye8i, Skt. yadi.
yana, m. favoi\ There is now hardly any doubt as to the
reading of this word and the lacuna in Bartholomae's Altiran.
Wb. , 1285 (yan + + m) should be removed. Jackson (JAOS, 27,
191) records: "There is a slight space between n and m, appar-
ently due to an original defect in the stone, and not to any la-
cuna in the tablet. I could see no evidence of any letter being
missing and I believe that the reading yanam may be accepted as
certain." Stolze's photograph (Pers. II, 95) evidently shows
simply this "defect in the stone" and makes Foy's proposed
emendation yaniyam, segen, improbable. Ace. sg. yanam, Dar.
Pers. d. 3. alta adam yanam jadiyamiy auramazdam, this OS a f amor I
pray of Ahura Mazda. Av. yana.
yanaiy, adv. lohereon. Xerx. Van. 3. yanaiy dlpim naiy nipistam
akunaus, whereon he had cut no inscription. Loc. sg. on instr.
stem of ya; so Mtiller, WZKM, 7, 112; Bartholomae, Altiran.
Wb., 1262; otherwise Foy (instr. yana -f ly; KZ, 37, 501); Bollen-
sen (yana naiy); Oppert (ya-naiy).
yam (Inchoative pres. yasa-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 135), to
reach, aftaJn. Av. yam, Skt. yam.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 121
With prefix a, uppropruiU^ take to oneself, seize as one's
possession. Mid. pret. 3 sg. ayasata (Bartholomae, BB, 14, 216),
Bh. 3. 7. karam ayasata, he tooh over the aniiy; Bh. 1.12. dahyava
hauv ayasata, the lands he seized as hU possession; Bab. + + ti a-na
§a ra-ma-ni-su ut-te-ir, he tooh it for himself; Elam. emitusa tuman-e,
he seized as his pomisslon . Cf . Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1,11. Kern
(ZDMG, 23, 229) read ayasta as nom. ag. with ace. Hoffmann
(BB, 18, 28.5) regarded the word as instr. sg. comparing Skt.
ayatta, abhangig von. Cf. Toy, KZ, 3.5, 33; Gray, AJP, 21, 14.
yava, adv. as long as. Skt. yavat. Cf . Delbriick, Vgl. Syntax,
3, 331.
yuviya, f. canal. Nom. sg. yuviya, Dar. Sz. c. 3. Ace. sg.
yuviyam, Dar. Sz. e. 3. Cf. Skt. yavya (instr.), RV. 8. 98, 8. PhL
yoi. New Pers. joi.
R
raucah, n. day. Nom. sg. rauca, Bh. 3. 1. 1 rauca ^akatam (q. v.)
aha, one day was completing its course. Ace. sg. rauca, Bh. 1. 7.
xsapava raucapativa, either hy night or- day. Instr. pi. (for nom.
pi.) raucabis, Bh. 3. 3. 23 raucabis 6akata (q. v.) aha", twenty-three-
days were completing their course. Av. raocah (Phi. roc, Turfan
MSS. r6j, New Pers. roz); fr. *ruc, to shine., YAv. rue, Skt. rue.
rautah, n. river. Nom. sg. rauta, Dar. Sz. c. 3. haca pirava.
nama rauta, from, the river JV^ile hy -name; for construction see s.
V. pirava. Phi. rCt, New Pers. rod, Kurd, ro; Skt. srotas fr. sru,
flow.
raxa (Elam. rakkan), f. name of a Persian town. Nom. sg.
raxa, Bh. 3. 6.
raga (Elam. rakkan; Bab. ra-ga-'), f. name of a Median district.
Nom. sg. raga, Bh. 2. 13. Abl. sg. (with haca) ragaya, Bh. 3. 1.
YAv. rayi. ^
rad (Pres. rada-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to leave. Skt. rah.
Cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 661; Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb., 1505.
122 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
with prefix ava, leave, abandon. Injunctive 3 sg. avarada.
Dar. NRa. 6. paftm tyam rastam ma avarada, leave not the true
jMth.
rad, f . see avahyaradiy.
rasa-, inchoative pres. ; see ar.
rasta, adj. true; so now Bartholomae (WZKM, 22, 88), com-
IDaring YAv. rasta, Turfan MSS. rait, true. Ace. sg. rastam,
NRa. 6.
+ + + + rtaiyiya, text confii-med by KT in Bh. 4. 1. 44. I sug-
gested (Vdt. Stud. 1. 30) the supplement [upava]rtaiy, I turn to
(i. e. appeal to AJrnra Mazda) regarding + + + + rtaiyiya as ditto-
graphy for + + + + rtaiy (cf . tyana mana, Bh. 1. 8). For this mean-
ing of upa + a -|- vart in Skt. cf . examples quoted in PWb. and
note Turfan MSS. vard. Elam. anldrir ^°uramasta-ra sap appa, /
state as a follower of Ahura Mazda. See s. v. auramazdah. Bar-
tholomae (WZKM, 22, 69) suggests aurama2d[a va]rtiyaiy (or avart-
or vavart-; cf. New Pers. avar), may Ahura Mazda he viy witness,
regarding the form as opt. 3 sg. of denom. to var built on nom.
ag. in tay. Hoffmann-Kutschke (Phil. Nov. 3, 103) proposes
auramaz[da baga majrtaiylya, Auramazda ist der Oott des Menschen,
wobei letzteres Wort wohl ftir martiyahya vermeisselt ware oder
besser martiyaiy vw. ixAprvi, Zeuge, mit vorhergehendem auramaz-
[dam], ich rife zwiii, Zeugen an. He interprets the Elam. ""^kiTir
""uramasta-ra, der (etnzige) Gott ist Auramazda.
Y3i, conj. end. or; va — va, Bh. 1. T. Av. va (Turfan MSS.
va, and, New Pers. va), Skt. va.
vaina-, pres. of na- class treated as thematic (Bartholomae,
Grundr. 132; cf. YAv. vainaiti, Turfan MSS. v6need. New Pers.
binaS, Skt. venati), to see. Mid. to seem. Act. ind. pret. 3 sg.
avaina. Subj. 2 Sg. vainahy. Mid. pres. 3 sg. vainataiy, Xerx.
Pers. a. 3.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 123
vaumisa (Elam. maumissa; Bab. u-mi-is-su), m. name of a Persikn
leader. Nom. sg. vaumisa. Ace. Sg. vaumisam. va[h]u + misa (cf .
mi^ra).
va^'abara, reading of WB in Dar. NRd. who translate Oenosse
(?); Bartholomae, Altiran. Wb. and Justi, ZDMG, 50, 669,
StaUrager ( ?). Otherwise Foy, ZDMG, 55, 509. It is, as Justi
observes, clearly a title of a court official. If va^'a = New Pers.
bar, hranch, hough, as Horn suggests, I would favor the meaning
how-hearer.
vayam, Av. vaem, Skt. vayam; see adam.
vayaspara (Elam. miSpar + +; Bab. mi-is-pa-ru-'), m. name of the
father of Intaphernes. Gen. sg. va[ya]sp[ara]hya, Bh. 4. 18. Foy
suggests the etymology vaya[t], flechtend (Skt. vayantl) + spara,
achild (Av. spara.dasta, New Pers. sipar) which Bartholomae
(Altiran. Wb., 1359) rejects because of the a in reference to the
New Pers. and <nrapa.l3a.pai in Hesychius. KT record va-, not va-.
var (Pres. vamav-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 131), to choose; Mid.
to convince. Mid. subj. 3 sg. vamavataiy (thematic), Bh. 4. 8.
mat[ya] iiaisa[iy] ima (Weissbach, ZDMG, 61, 728) vamavataiy,
lest it does not convince him. Impv. 3 sg. vamavatam (thematic),
Bh. 4. 6, 10. Av. var. Skt. vr. Cf . Keller, KZ, 39, 176. Note
Turf an MSS. n6 varovftd.
varkana (Elam. mirkaniya; Gr. 'YpKavta), adj. as subs. liyrcania.
Nom. sg. varkana. Cf. YAv. vshrka, wolf (New Pers. gurg), Skt.
vrka.
[vart, {o turn; with prefix upa + a. 1 sg. mid. [upavajrtaiy, /
appeal. See + + + + rtaiyiya.]
vardana, n. town. Nom. sg. vardanam. GAv. varazSna, YAv.
varazana (New Pers. barzan; cf. Noldeke, ZDMG, 46, 442), Skt.
vrjana. Note also Justi, IF. Anz. 18, 39.
vasiy, adv. much., to a great extent., in large mimbers, utterly.
Phi. vas, New Pers. bas, Bal. gvas; fr. *vas, to toish, Av. vas, Skt.
vac. Gray renders etymologically, at will, AJP, 21, 15. For
124 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
reading vasaiy (*unsxhai), see Foy, KZ, 35, 21; Mtiller's vasiya,
gewait, menge (WZKM, 7, 257; cf. Pedersen, KZ, 40, 134) is
improbable.
vasdasaka, uncertain word in Seal Inscr. c. vasda saka, WB.
vasna, m. will., favor. Instr. 'Sg. vasna; vasna auramazdaha, Dei
gratia (Dar. Inscr. 41 times; Xerx. Inscr. 6 times; Art. II. Inscr.
once). The divine right of kings is recognized not only in this
phrase but in such expressions as auramazda xsa^'am mana frabara
(Dar. Inscr. 7 times); hya (mam) xsayaftyam akunaus (Dar. Inscr. 5
times; Xerx. Inscr. 6 times; Art. III. Inscr. once). Av. vasna;
fr. *vas, to wish, Av. vas (Tiirfan MSS. vasnad), Skt. vac.
vazarka, adj. great, mighty. The word is probably thus to be
read instead of the common transliteration vazraka (YAv. vazra.
New Pers. gurz, Skt. vajra, Indra's thunderbolt) of ed. and KT.
Cf. TavvoidpKrji — Persian tanu-vazarta, great in iody. Noldeke
argued against vazraka oa the ground that it would give New
Pers. *bazra or *guzra, not buzurg, yet I fail to see his phonetic rea-
sons. Cf. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1. 7; Foy, KZ, 37, 537; Bar-
tholomae, Altiran. Wb., 1390, n. Nom. sg. m. vazarka. Ace. sg.
n. vazarkam. Gen. Sg. f. vazarkaya. Turf an MSS. vazui'g. New
Pers. buzurg, Paz. guzurg. Cf . Jud. Pers. buzurgan.
vahauka (Elam. maukka), m. name of the father of Ardumanish.
Gen. sg. vahau[kahya], Bh. 4. 18.
vahyavisdapaya, uncertain word in Seal Inscr. d. vahyavisda
paya, WB.
vahyazdata (Elam. mistatta; Bab. u-mi-iz-da-a-tu), m. name of a
Persian rebel. Nom. sg. vahyazdata. Gen. sg. vahyazdatahya (sic;
cf. Bartholomae, Grundr. 412, n), Bh. 3. 6, 7. Ace. sg. vahyaz-
datam.
viy, verbal prefix, apart, away, e. g. viyaka" (see kan). Av. vi
(New Pers. gu-), Skt. vi.
Y\0, f. l)royal court, royal race. '2)royal palace. Cf. Turfan
MSS. visbM. Ace. sg. vi^am (written V^am in Bh. 1. 1^1). Instr.
sg. (with patiy) v'^apatiy, Bh. 3. 5. kara parsa hya v'fepatiy (text as.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 125
confirmed by KT, thus setting aside Toy's emendation (KZ, 37,
656) viftyapatiy, vifty + apatiy, zu hause in opposition to the army
in the field; of. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 24). Loc. sg. (with post-
pos. a) v*ftya, Bh. 4. 13. martiya hya hamataxsata mana v'ft[ya], the
mm who alil'd irnj royal house. Bartholomae (Altiran. Wb.,
1446) takes viftya as gen. sg. of yidl with meaning of yiO. viftya,
-Dar. Pers. c. A\'. vis. Slit. vie.
y'liJ^bMs" (read either vi^aibiS or viftbls), an adj. in instr. pi.
agreeing with bagaibis in Dar. Pers. d. 11. 22, 24. The commonly
accepted view at present regards the word as vi^a, «/^ < visa <
vispa (cf. asa < aspa). I do not attach to the Bab. phrase, Dar.
Pers. g. 24, itti ilani gabbi, with all the gods, the importance some
scholars have given it. The polytheism of the Babylonians
would obscure a distinctive Persian religious conception in the
epithet. Note s. v. drauga, how the Bab. translation fails to re-
produce the Persian thought. This meaning has also suf[ered
through the correction v'^^b^is^ca (q. v.) in Bh. 1. 1. 65, which
cannot now signify all, as was formerly suggested. The older
reading and interpretation viftbis bagaibis, vjith the gods of the
royal house or, as Justi (IF, 17, Anz. 108) puts it, mit den vom
Stamm verehrten Gottern, come again into prominence. So Foy
(KZ, 33, 431), Rawlinson, Spiegel, WB, Tiele {met de goden van
den stani), Bartholomae (Zum Altiran. Wb. , 227). For a discus-
sion of this epithet in reference to the O^ol ^aa-iXrjioi, of Hdt. see
Tolman, PAPA, 33, 68. Cf. Gray, JAOS, 21, 181; ibid. 23, 56;
Foy, KZ, 37, 533; Eapp, ZDMG, 19, 67; Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 108;
Pedersen, KZ, 40, 133.
v'^'*b''is''ca, text as confirmed by Jackson and KT in Bh. 1. 1.
65. Cf. Turfan MSS. visbed. The late discussions of the word
have been based on the reading viSaibis; cf . Gray, JAOS, 23, 56,
who regarded the form as instr. pi. for ace. pi., translating and
all things; See now Bartholomae, Zum Altiran. Wb. , 227. Foy's
vi^abisaca-ca (ZDMG, 54, 349), geschlecldsgefolgschaft agrees more
closely with the reading which we must now adopt. In Vdt.
Stud. 1, 14, I suggested vi^bis (Av. viz'bis) instr. pi. for ace. pi.,
and the royal residences; or as Justi (IF, 17, Anz. 108), einzelne
Hailser {viO ist in der Inscrift des Dareios palastes die Bezeich-
Dung dieses Gebiiude, nicht des ganzen Schlosses oder der Burg
I2(i ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
von Persepolis, welche iu tier susischen Bauurkunde an der sud-
lichen ilauer haivarras heisst). Gray in a personal letter to me
suggests vi^abis (instr. pi. n.) relating to the royal residences^ com-
paring Av. visan, der ein Ilaus, Hausweneii hat.
vi°dafarnah (Elam. mintapama; Gr. ^Ivracjyipvq^), m. Iritap hemes,
name of ally of Darius against the false Siuerdis, Bh. 3. 14; 4.
18; thus read vi"dafar[na], Bh. 3. 1. 84, [v]i"da[fam]a, 1. 86, vi"da-
[farjna, 1. 88, text as confirmed by KT, which removes viMafra of
ed. from the Persian vocabulary; of. Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1. 27.
*vi°da(t), act. pres. part, to vii,,j/ind, Av. vid (Turfan MSS. vin-
dad, Middle Pers. vinditan), Skt. vid, + *famah, fflory, YAv.
x^aranah.
vidarna (Elam. mitama; Bab. u-mi-da-ar-na-'; Gr. 'YBdpvrj's), m. Hy-
darnes, name of ally of Darius against the false Smerdis. Nom.
Sg. vidaraa. The restoration [ma]na for vidamahya of ed. in Bh. 2.
1. 25 is certain; cf. KT, 26.
viyaxna (Elam. miyakannas; Bab. addaru), m. name of a Persian
month, Feb. -March (i. e. Adar, twelfth month; cf. Bab.). Gen.
sg. viyaxnahya (sic; cf. KT, 8, 54), Bh. 1. 11; 3. 11.
viyana[sa]ya, text in Bh. 4. 1. 66 as confirmed by KT, (who-
ever) injured (my house). Foy suggests viyanaSaya, wer schadete
and regards the form as pret. 3 sg. caus. to *nas, perish, Av. nas
(Middle Pers. nasitan), Skt. nac.
vivana (Elam. mimana; Bab. u-mi-ma-na-'), m. name of a Persian.
Nom. sg. vivana. Acc. Sg. vivanam.
visa, adj. all. Acc. sg. n. visam. vispa, all > vis(s)a ^ visa.
visadahyu, adj. containing all lands. Acc. sg. m. visadahymn,
Xerx. Pers. a. 3. duvarftm visadahymn, "the hall where the repre-
sentatives of the several provinces brought at stated times their
homage to the Great King." Bartholomae. visa -f dahyu (q. v.).
vispazana, adj. containing all hinds of people. Gen. pi. f . vis-
pazananam, Dar. NRa. 2. vispa, all, Av. vispa (jMiddle Pers. visp),
Skt. vicva -|- zana, man, Skt. jana; cf. paruzana.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 127
vistaspa (Elam. mistaspa; Bab. us-ta-as-pi; Gr. 'Yo-rao-Tn;?), m. Ilye-
taspes, father of Darius. Nom. sg. vistaspa. Ace. sg. vistaspam.
Gen. sg. vistaspahya. *vista (Middle Pers. viSaSak) dcprenHad (vi +
had, sit^ settle down; cf. Skt. vi + sad, to sink, dmpond) + aspa,
horse (q. v.). As a poss. compouDd the name must mean, he of
spiritless horses. Note New Pers. gustasp, cf. Horn, NS, 27, 3.
Written always v'st- in Bh.
vispauzati (Elam. mispauzatis; cf. KT, 41), f. name of a Parthian
town. Nom. sg. vis[pa]uz[a]tis, Bh. 2. 16.
saka (Elam. aakka; Bab. matu gi-mi-ri; Gr. Sku'^i), adj. as subs.
Scythian, Scythia. Nom. sg. saka. Nom. pi. saka.
saka, f . Scythia. Ace. sg. saiam, Bh. 5. ■4. abiy sakam, against
Scythia, text confirmed by KT.
[san, with suffix viy, to destroy, the reading of KT in Bh. 4. 11.
71 73, 77. Better read vikan-, see s. v. kan, and Tolman, Vdt.
Stud. 1, 34.]
s'4:'*, an uncertain word in Dar. NRa. 1. 52, [ma]m auramazda
patuv haca s^r* + + +• The meaning is shown by Elam. musnika
and Bab. bi-i-si, evil. Because of the correspondence of these
words with gasta 1. 58, Foy would emend haca gasta, from, enil.
Jackson (J AGS, 20, 56) suggests a comparison with Skt. chala
and translates (JAGS, 21, 171) /rem treachery (haca sara, abl.).
[sar, asariyata, reading of KT in Bh. 3. 1. 92. See akariya"ta .s. v.
kar, and Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1. 28.]
sikayauvati (Elam. sikkiumatis; Bab. sik-kam-u-ba-at-ti-'), f. name
of a fortress in Media. Nom. sg. sika[ya]uvatis, Bh. 1. 13.
suguda (Elam. suktas; Bab. su-ug-du; Gr. SoySuavi?), adj. as subs.
Sogdiana. Nom. sg. suguda. YAv. suySa.
sku°xa (Elam. iskunka), m. name of a Scythian rebel. Nom.
so-, sku'-xa (thus read for sku°ka of ed. in Bh. k.). In Bh. 5. 1. 27
:i'S ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
s[ku°]xa is clearly to be supplied. The note of KT (later cor-
rected) that the name cannot be restored is based on their wrong
transliteration of the word in Bh. k. ; cf . Tolman, Vdt. Stud,
1, 37.
skudra, m. name of a district. Nom. sg. skudra, Dar. NEa. 3.
sta (Pres. ista-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 127, showing transfer to
thematic conjugation as in Av. Mstaiti and Skt. tisthati; cf. Tol-
man, Old Persian Notes, 203), to stand, ludt. Mid. Pret. 3 sg.
aistata. Av. sta (Turfan MSS. ested, New Pers. estadan), Skt. stha.
with prefix ava (Pres. staya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 147),
place, restore. Pret. 1 sg. avastayam. Cf. KZ, 39, M.
with prefix niy (Pres. staya-, see above), enjoin, command.
Pret. 1 sg. niyastayam. 3 sg. niyastaya.
stana, n. 2}lace. Ace. sg. stanam, Xerx. Van. 3. Skt. sthana.
New Pers. -stan; fr. sta (q. v.).
star (Pres. starav-, Bartholomae, Grundr. Ill), to sin. Injunc-
tive 2 sg. starava (thematic). Dar. NRa. 6, ma starava, sin not; so
Bartholomae (Altiran. Wb., 1597) in defense of the old reading
against WB's stakava, sei n icht ungerecht. WB" now read starava.
sparda (Elam. isparta; Bab. sa-par-du), m. name of a region; ac-
cording to Lassen, Sardis; cf. Meyer, IF, 1, 326-29; Mtiller,
WZKM, 2, 93; Gray, AJP, 21, 3. Nom. sg. sparda.
sa, abl. sg. pron. end. in haca avadasa, therefrom. YAv.
io (New Pers. (a)s). See s. v. avada.
saiy, dat. sg. pron. end. GAr. h5i, YAv. hi. Bh. 2. 7,
avafe[saiy] aOaham, thus I said to liim, et passim, uta naham uta
gausa uta harbanam frajanam, Bh. 3. 13, I cut off loth his nose and
his ears and his tongue.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON V29
sakauri[m], word of doubtful meaning in Bh. 4. 13, naiy sakau-
ri[m] + + + tunuvatam (KT; manuvatam, Jackson) zura akunavam. The
Bab. renders lik-tu u mus-ki-nu. It seems to me possible that the
Bab. Uk-tu (= sakaurim) and mus-kl-nu (= + + t"n'Hiv'H''ni'') from their
derivation may refer to the two lowest classes of the kingdom,
lik-tu, slave, lit. one received (against Findling, Delitzsch, Muss-
Arnolt) and mus-ki-nu, generally rendered pauper; cf. Muss-
Arnolt, Assyrian Dictionary, 604, but note Johns: "I think it
very probable that the class included the subject race, not prop-
erty less, but of lower standing. It may have included freed
slaves and foreign residents." Weissbach (ZDGrM, 61, 729) in-
terprets dem Findling; Hoffmann-Kutschke (Phil. Nov. 3, 108)
Knecht, Horiger, Gefolge. Bang suggests that sakaurim is a Se-
mitic loan word *§akoiim, einem Verlewmder. It is doubtful
whether KT's translation of Bab. version to the prisoner ( ?) and
freed man is correct. See s. v. + + + t^n^uv^fm* and m''ii'SivH''m''
(cf. Turfan MSS. manbfid). The reading is attested by the
recent collations of the text and the various attempted emenda-
tions (KZ, 36, 45; ibid. 37, 5.o7; IF, 12, 130) are impossible.
t
sam, gen. pi. pron. end., a re-formation to dat. sg. saiy
and abl. sg. sa after analogy of noun-stems, Bartholomae,
Grundr. 251, n. Bh. 3. 10, avafesam a^aha, thus he said to them.
Bh. 2. 4, byasam maftsta aha, who was chief of them. Bh. 5. 1. 15,
uta[s]am auramazda + + + + a + + _(,+.
sim, acc. sg. pron. end. YAv. him, Skt. sim. Bh. 1. 13,
xsa^'amsim adam adinam, I took the royal power from him. Bh. 1.
14, adamsim gafeva avastayam, I restored it (i. e. , the hingdoni) to its
place. As acc. pi. n. Bh. 4. 1. 6, adamsim (text confirmed by KT
for adamsam of ed.) ajanam, I vmged these (i. e. hattles), wrongly
translated by KT, / overthreio nine Lings; cf. Tolman, Vdt.
Stud. 1, 28.
■-)
siyati, f. well being. Nom. sg. siyatis, Dar. Pers. e. 3. Acc.
sg. siyatim (written sayatam in Art. Pers. a, b, 1; Foy, KZ, 35,
58 after Marquart, ZDMG, 49, 671, reads saytam). YAv. sati;
fr. *siya, Av. sya, rejoice (Turfan MSS. sad, New Pers. sad). Cf .
Casartelli, La Religion, 41; Stave, Einiluss des Parsismus, 64;
9
130 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
Jackson (JAOS, 21, 166) compares Isaiah, 45, 7: "I am JHVH,
and there is none else — who forms light and creates darkness,
Mho makes welfare and creates calamity."
siyu (Pres. siyava-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), io set forth, go.
Pret. 1 sg. asiyavam. 3 Sg. asiyava. 3 pl.asiyava". GAv. syu.
YAv. su (New Pers. savaS, Oss. caiin, Kurd, cian), Skt. cyu.
sis, ace. pi. pron. end. YAv. his. Bh. 3. 8, avadasis
uzmayapatiy akunavam, there I crucified them. Cf. Delbrtick, Vgl.
Syntax, 8, 47.
zazana (Elam. zazzan; Bab. za-za-an-nu), m. name of a Babylonian
town. Nom. sg. zazana, Bh. 1. 19.
zurakara, adj. doing wrong. Nom. sg. m. zurakara, Bh. 4. 13.
naiy zurakara aham, I was not an evil-doer (text confirmed by Jack-
son and KT). The word is also to be read in Bh. 4. 1. 68, hyava
[zujrakara (text confirmed by KT), thus superseding the various
attempts at emendation (stavaka,Justi; starts, Bartholomae; atarta,
WB') and confirming Muller's conjecture in WZKM, 1, 134; cf.
Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 33. zGrah + *kara, fr. kar (q. v.).
zurah, n. wrong, deceit. Ace. sg. zura (text confirmed by
Jackson and KT). YAv. zurah- (New Pers. zur).
+ + + + y (Elam. zuzza; Bab. zu-u-zu), name of a town in Bh. 2.
1. 33. "The name was composed of 5, possibly 6, signs, of
which only the last is visible." KT.
zra"ka (Elam. [zirra]nkas; Bab. za-ra-an-ga-'; Gr. Apayyuii/i^), m.
Drangiana. Nom. sg. zra^'ka.
halna, f . army, hostile host, array of evil. Nom. sg. haina,
Dar. Pers. d. 3. Abl. sg. (with haca) hainaya, Dar. Pers. d. 3.
YAv. haena (Middle Pers. hen), Skt. sena; fr. *hi, hind, Av. hi
,(New Pers. gusayaS, he uncovered), Skt. si.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 131
hauv, demon, pron. nom. sg. m. f . (I. E. *so + u, Gr. ou-ros),
l)thaL In Bh. 1. 1. 29 written hauv''m'' (cf. KT, 6). Probably the
-am, as Bartholomae suggests (WZKM, 22, 65), is to be compared
with the suffix in adam, tuvam, iyam, but I believe it comes here
only through analogy; cf. Prakrit tumam, t^tou, beside tum. Bh.
3. 10, hauv kara asiyava, that army set forth ^ et passim. 2)that one,
he, it. Bh. 1. 12, hauv ayasata, he (i. e. Gaumata) seized {the lands)
as his own. Bh. 3. 3, hauvmaiy hami^''iya (sic; of. KT, M) abava,
it (i. e., the land of Margiana) hecame rehellious to me. With
end. saiy and ciy written hausaiy, hauciy. YAv. hau, m. f. (as if an
extension of the fern. I. E. sa -(- u, Gr. av-rnj), Skt. a-sau, m. f.
Note Turf an MSS. hS.
haumavarka (Elam. umumarka; Bab. umurga), adj. designating a
part of the Scythians in Dar. NRa. 3. If the reading be cor-
rect, the word would seem to apply to a custom in regard to the
use of lemes *varka, YAv. varaka for the drink of the *hauma,
YAv. haoma, Skt. soma; cf. Hillebrandt, Ved. Myth. 1, 102; Foy,
KZ, 35, 51. Should the last member of the compound be read
varga (after the Bab.), the interpretation still remains doubtful.
Foy suggests, die Rauvi.ahemmenden (cf . Skt. vrj) or die Eauma-
lereitenden (cf. Skt. vrjana). Nom. pi. haumavar[ka]. Cf. Hdt.
7. 64, eovTas Sxvfcs 'A/ivpytovs.
haxamanis (Elam. akkamannis; Bab. a-ha-ma-ni-is-'; Gr. 'Axai/icvTjs),
m. Achaemenes; founder of the Achaemenidan dynasty. Nom.
sg. haxamanis, Bh. 1. 2; Bh. a. 2. *haxa (nom. Sg. in comp.),
friend, YAv. haxi, Skt. sakhi -f- *manis, Av. manah; fr. l)man
(q. v.). Cf. Bartholomae, Zum Altiran. Wb., 39. Note Turf an
MSS. hasa-gerd.
haxamanisiya (Elam. akkamannisiya; Bab. a-ha-ma-ni-is-'; Gr.
'Axai/Aei/tSijs), adj. of the race of Achaemenes, Achaemenidan.
Nom. sg. haxamanisiya (written haxamanisiya in Xerx. Pers. a. 2).
Nom. pi. haxamanisiya. For the Achaemenidan dynasty cf . Tol-
man and Stevenson, Hdt. and Empires of East, 73 ff. ; Meyer,
Gesch. des Altert. 1. 613; Pr^lek, Forsch. z. Gesch. d. Altert.
3 24, vs. the extreme view of Winckler, Or. Litt. Ztg., 1898,
43; Noldeke, Aufsatze z. pers. Gesch. 15; Justi, Grundr. d. iran.
Philol. 2, 416; Weissbach, Assyriol. Bibl. 9. 86. haxamanis
(q. V.) -|- suffix ya.
132 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
hagmatana (Elam. akmatana; Bab. a-ga-nm-ta-nu; Gr. 'EKySaTava,
'Ay/Sarara), m. £cbatana. Loc. Sg. hagmatanaiy. New Pers. ham-
aSan, cf. Hiibschmann, Lautl. 143.
haca, prep, with abl. from. Bh. 2. 12, haca habirnvis, from Bab-
ylon. Bh. 1. 11, haca a.ya.ia.s&, from there. With tarsa-, Bh. 1. 13,
karasim haca darsma" atarsa, the people feared his tyranny. GAv.
haca, YAv. haca (Phi. aj, Turfan MSS. 'aj, New Pers. az, Kurd, az),
Skt. saca.
ha^j (Pres. ha"ja-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to hale to prison
or inflict some form of penalty. Skt. saSj; cf . Foy, KZ, 37, 547.
with prefix fra; Pret. 1 sg. fraha"jam, Bh. 2. 13.
had, to sit. YAv. had (Turfan MSS. nillyftnd, New Pers. ni-
sastan), Skt. sad.
with prefix niy (cans, nisadaya-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 151),
place douv), establish. Pret. 1 sg. niyasadayam, Dar. NRa. 4.
hada, prep, with instr. with. GAv. hada, XK\. haSa (Turfan
MSS. 'ad, Oss. id), Skt. saha.
hadaxaya, an uncertain word in Seal Inscr. b, hadaxaya + + + + +
^ada^a.
hadis, n. dwelling p)lace. Ace. sg. hadis, Xerx. Sus. ; Xerx.
Pers. cb. da.; Art. Sus. Cf. had.
ha"duga, f. proclamation, record. Ace. sg. ha°dugam, Bh. 4.
10, 11.
hapariya- (Bartholomae's conjecture, Studien, 2, 67 in Bh. 1.
I. 23; cf. Skt. saparyati), to reverence., respect. Pret. 3 pi. apari-
yaya" (for ahapariya-), see s. V. data. Cf. Justi, IF, 17, Anz. 106;
Tolman, Vdt. Stud. 1, 9. KT still read apariyaya; WB"
upariyaya(?).
ham, verbal prefix, together., e. g., ha"gmata, a^setMed together.
GAv. ham, YAv. ham (Middle Pers. ham), Skt. sam.
ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON 133
hama, adj. came, one and the same; cf. Weissbach, ZDMG,
61, <24. Gen. sg. f. hamahyaya (a re-formatioa of gen. of a- stem
on uiasc. gen. suffix; cf. ahyaya). See s. v. 0ard. Av. hama (Middle
Pers. ; New Pers. ham), Skt. sama. For + + + + + + ara hama amax-
amata of KT in Bh. 4. 1. 92, Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 730) emends,
kara hama amaxahya"ta, die Leute allzumal freut&n sich; cf . Elam.
tassutum-pe sapis.
hamatar, adj. having a comnion mother. Nom. sg. m. hamata,
Bh. 1. 10. ham (ha) + *matar, Av. matar (New Pers. madar, Gil.
maar), Skt. matr; or by haplography, as Bartholomae suggests,
for hama -f- matar.
hamapitar, adj. homing a common fatlier. Nom. sg. m. hama-
pita, Bh. 1. 10. hama, sam,e + pitar (q. T.).
hamara, m. ./oe, enemy. Ace. sg. hamaram, Dar. NEa. 4. [hac]a
parsa hamaram patiyajata, fo/r from, Persia he fought h/is foe: so
Bartholomae. ham + *ara, fr. ar (q. v.).
•
hamarana, n. iattle, conflict. Nom. ace. sg.. hamaranam. Ace.
pi. hamarana. YAv. hamarana, Skt. samarana; ham -j- *arana, fr. ar
(q. y.).
hami^'iya, adj. rebellious. Nom. sg. m. hami^'iya. Nom. sg.
f . hami^'iya, thus read in Bh. 3. 1. 11 (text confirmed by KT,
which removes hasitiya from the Persian vocabulary; cf . Tolman,
Vdt. Stud. 1, 23). Ace. sg. m. haml6''iyam. Nom. dual. m. (Bar-
tholomae), hami^'iya, Bh. 2. 16. Nom. pi. m. f. hami^'iya. Acc.
pi. f. [hami^^Ja, Bh. 4. 4. Instr. pi. m. hami^'iyaibis, Bh. 3. 1.
According to Justi, IF, 18, Anz. 36, ha -f- mi^, paarweise ver-
ilnden.
[har (Pres. hara-, Bartholomae, Grundr. 123), to flee. Oppert's
supplement [aharatja, pret. 3 sg. in Bh. 1. 95. See s. v. l)ah.]
haraiva (Elam. ariya; Bab. a-ri-e-mu), m. Aria. Nom. sg. haraiva.
YAv. haroiva.
harauvati (Elam. arraumatis; Bab. a-ru-ha-at-ti; Gr. 'Apaxwtria), f.
ArachoKia . Nom. sg. harauvatis. Acc. sg. harauvatim. Loc. Sg.
harauvatiya. Skt. sarasyati, rich in waters; *harah, water., fr. *har,
floiv., Skt. sj -f- suffix vant.
234 ANCIENT PERSIAN LEXICON
haruva, adj. whole. Nom. sg. m. haruva. YAv. haurva (Tur-
fan MSS harv, New Pers. har), Skt. sarva.
h°r^bana, m. tongue. Ace. sg. harbanam, Bh. 2, 13. aaamsai[jr]
uta naham uta gausa uta harbanam frajanam, / cut off hoth his nose and
his ears and his tongue. KT record: "Of the signs r, b, and n
traces are preserved upon the rock; the remaining signs arc
clear." Weissbach (ZDMG, 61, 726) suggests uzbana, i. e. hu-zbana.
Note New Pers. ■^''ban, z"ban; cf. Horn, NS, 34, 5.
haldita (Elam. altita) m. name of father of Arkha. Gen. >-i;'.
halditahya (sic; cf. Bartholomae, Grundr. 412, n.), Bh. 3. 13.
hasiya, adj. true. Ace. sg. n. hasiyam, Bh. 4. 7. Av. haiflya,
Skt. satya; fr. *hat (weak stem to *hant, pres. act. part, to 2)ah) -{-
suffix ya.
hi"du, m. India. Nom. sg. hPdus. YAv. hindu, Skt. sindhu, the
land on the Indus.
hya (I. E. *sio), rel. pron. (originally demon.), who. Nom. sg.
m. hya. KT's cuneiform text and transliteration fail to record
hya after martiya in Bh. 4. 1. 65, where I have restored it as in
ed., regarding its omission as simply a blunder in copying.
Nom. sg. f. hya. Cf. tya. Skt. sya.
[hya, regard by Bartholomae as abl. sg., whence., hence in Dar.
Pers. e. 3, hya auvais[ta]m slyatis, hence for long time, etc. It is
more probably the nom. sg. f.; cf. Foy, KZ, 37, 561.]
hyaparam, adv. thereafter, thereuj)on. Bh. 3. 11, patiy hyapa-
ram. hya (abl. Sg. n.) + *para, later, leyond. Cf. Bartholomae,
Altiran. Wb., 1S44. Skt. para.
I 11 ||l f!!|
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11